SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Standard .‘, -: :;.i\ ‘\ I .
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Publication number: 553-3001-I 00 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All right reserved System overview 553-3001-l 00 -. .:. .: .
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 ‘: \ :.
iii About this document This document describes the features and services, hardware and software architecture, and the family of products that comprise Meridian 1.
iv About this document - General maintenance information (553-3001-500) - Fault clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overview of software architecture, procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed description of all Xl 1 features and services.
V Contents Meridian 1 1 The Meridian 1 commitment Advanced features 2 5 System architecture 9 Meridian 1 modular architecture Control Switching Peripherals Software architecture Firmware Software Office Data Resident Programs Non-Resident Programs Hardware architecture Common equipment Network equipment Peripheral Equipment Power equipment 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 13 13 17 31 32 Product description 37 Universal Equipment Modules CPU module (NT8D34) CPU/Network module (NT6D39) Network module (NT
vi Contents Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) Pedestal (NT8D27AB) Top cap (NT7DOO) Expansion kit (NT8D49) Meridian 1 system options Meridian 1 system option 21A Meridian 1 system option 21 Meridian 1 system option 51 Meridian 1 System option 61 Meridian 1 system option 71 List of terms System overview 553-3001-l 00 (NT8D47) 52 54 55 57 57 57 60 60 62 64 66 68 71
1 Meridian 1 Introduction Meridian 1 Communication Systems are a family of digital multiplex voice and data switching systems built upon a foundation of state of the art digital switching equipment and advanced software program control. Meridian 1 systems provide a wide range of sophisticated voice and data services for both Private Branch Exchange (PBX) and Central Office (CO) applications ranging in size from 30 to 60,000 ports.
2 Meridian 1 Meridian Modular Telephones, a family of digital telephones that utilize standard twisted pair wiring and support a wide range of data communications options. Meridian 1 LANSTAR, a 2.56 Mbps local area network (LAN) for Macintosh II and IBM PC compatible computers.
Meridian 1 3 System reliability Meridian 1 systems are designed and built to meet the highest standards for reliability, resulting in less downtime and increased system availability. In most systems, critical system elements are duplicated to guarantee system reliability. There are two identical Central Processing Unit (CPU) and memory circuits in most system configurations, and both CPUs can access both memory circuits.
4 Meridian 1 systems. A System Monitor is installed in.the pedestal of each column. The System Monitor located in the column containing CPU0 acts as the master system monitor; monitors located in other columns act as slaves. The master polls the slaves and reports their status to the CPU. The master System Monitor is connected to the CPU by an RS232C port located on an SD1 card. Slave System Monitors are connected to the master in a daisy chain fashion with an 8-conductor RJ type connector.
Meridian 1 5 Ease of installation Every Meridian 1 system is shipped from the factory assembled and equipped to order. Installation effort is reduced to unpacking and positioning equipment, plugging in connectorized cables, ‘and adding customer-specific programming where required. Ease of expansion The modular packaging scheme employed by the Meridian 1 family of products accommodates growth by permitting easy expansion. System expansion simply requires adding one or more UEMs.
6 Meridian 1 ESN The Electronic Switched Network (ESN) group of features supports voice and circuit-switched voiceband data telecommunications for multiplelocation customer applications. ESN applications range from a single network node (combined PBX and network switching system) to a widelydispersed network with up to 256 locations.
Meridian 1 7 Meridian Mail voice messaging eliminates telephone tag and wasted calls by allowing detailed messages to be exchanged when parties are unavailable or busy. Guided by easy to follow prompts, a user can leave messages for others, retrieve messages, forward messages, and respond to messages with the touch of a single button. i . I I .: -. ‘Z.., :.,-;. . ...: “T’.
8 Meridian 1 , r- h . . . -* _ .’ System overview + ..
9 System architecture Meridian 1 modular architecture An important characteristic of Meridian 1 systems is a modular system architecture. It utilizes an efficient and flexible approach, employing modular construction in all areas of hardware and software, and state-of-theart commercial and custom components. The result is a system which is highly flexible in terms of operational, maintenance, and administrative characteristics.
10 System architecture Peripherals Peripheral equipment provides the analog and digital interfaces for all peripheral devices, and performs analog to digital conversion of all input signals before switching is performed by the Network. Additionally, Peripheral equipment circuits provide the supervisory and transmission functions needed for trunks connected to the external telecommunications network.
System architecture I I Firmware .:; ::j .,. “. ,‘;-T._....~ >g ->yyI :. . ~ ;-“‘: . . ,,’ : These are fundamental programs consisting of hard-wired logic instructions stored in Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) which manipulate data in the central processor and control input/output operations, error diagnostic and recovery routines. Software Software programs consist of instruction sequences that control call processing, peripheral equipment, administration and maintenance functions.
12 System architecture receive output simultaneously. A terminal may be configured as an input only or output only device. Overlay programs provide the system interface for maintenance, service change, and traffic measurement. Each overlay program is independent and has its own specific set of commands and formats. Overlay programs may be run concurrently with normal call processing without interfering with system traffic.
System architecture 13 a midnight routine or on a conditional basis (i. e. , data dump only occurs if a software service change has been made). It may also be invoked manually via the input/output (I/O) interface to the system. Software Audit This program monitors system operation and gives an indication of the general state of the system operation. The program is concerned mainly with the system software. When a software problem is encountered, the program attempts to clear the problem automatically.
14 System architecture - The system memory stores all operating software programs and data unique to the particular Meridian 1 system, including switching sequences, features, class of service information, and quantity and types of terminals. - The Mass Storage Unit provides high speed loading of the operating programs and data into memory. - The Digital Service Circuits provide functions such as dial and ringing tones, and call conferencing capabilities.
System architecture 15 - asynchronous (handshake) bus operation - 16 file registers used to hold address and data for all operations - a sense (interrupt) input line to indicate that a particular device (tape, TTY, PE) requires action by the CPU - a trap facility which, when activated by an external signal, causes the CPU to immediately begin executing instructions starting at a particular address; this facility is used to enter a recovery routine when a fault is detected Mass Storage Unit A mass storage
16 System architecture Both types of Mass Storage Unit (MSU) are compatible with any Meridian 1 system running Software Generic Xl 1 Release 8 or later. The upgrade procedure involves replacing the Magnetic Tape Transport and associated tape interface with the desired Mass Storage Unit and equivalent Mass Storage Interface card (MSI) or Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) card.
System architecture 17 I ‘. ! _‘:I 2 ‘J ! I : _ .. . . . . . .- .. . . . . > . . : ::‘ ‘:<-i.., ‘,‘-.,--,: ‘:.A,, Firmware - This portion of the memory is a non-volatile Read Only Memory (ROM) used for storage of all system fiiware. The ROM is programmed during manufacture and the instructions are permanent and indestructible. It stores the basic rules of operation necessary to initialize the system and bring it into a working state.
18 System architecture Meridian 1 systems provide two network circuit cards, the QPC414 Network Card which provides 2 loops per card, and the NT8DO4AA Superloop Network Card which provides 4 loops per card, grouped together in an entity called a Superloop. The Superloop permits all 120 ‘timeslots provided by the network card to be shared among the peripheral devices served by the superloop, providing higher traffic capacity and simplified traffic engineering.
System architecture 19 Network/Peripheral configuration The allocation of peripheral equipment to the network loop determines the traffic handling capability of the switching network. The lower the number of terminations, the higher the loop traffic capacity. The quantity and type of terminal assignments are allocated to optimize the traffic handling capabilities of the switching network. A universal PE bus structure permits any mix of PE card types to be located in a PE module.
20 System architecture Figure 2 Single and dual loop configurations PE UEMIOR QPc414 ENET Circuit Pack Network SHELF Two Network Loops Connected To One PE Shelf Containing Single, Double Or Quad Density PE Ctrcuit Packs Loop Network Loop PE UEMI OR SHELF $F[ One Network Loop Connected To Two -PE Shelves Containing Single Or Double Density PE Circuit Pa&s PE UEMl OR SHELF Combined Single And Dual Loop Connections To Three PE Shelves Containing Single Or Double Density PE Circuit Packs System overvie
System architecture 21 Superloop Network Configurations The Superloop Network Card combines four regular network loops to make 120 timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules. This increased bandwiath and larger pool of timeslots increases the network traffic capacity by 25% for each 120 timeslot bundle. The NT8D37 Intelligent PE Module is divided into segments of 4 card slots. These segments are numbered O-3.
22 System architecture Figure 3 NT8D37 lntellegent Peripheral Module segmentation segment 0 segment 1 Line Cards: NTBWPAA Digital Line Card 16 to 32 TNs NT8W3AA Analog Line Card 16 MS NTBDOSAA Message Waiting Line Card 16 TNs segment2 -- Segment 3 Trunk Cards: NTBD14AA Universal Trunk Card 8 TNs NT8DlMA E&M Trunk Card 4 TNs TN density: Per segment 16 iu 128 TNs Per IPE module 64 to 512 TNs Note: Maximum TN density assumes ail slots equipped with NT8DMM Diiital Line Cards with 16 voice and 16 data TNs
System architecture 23 1 segment per Superloop In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 4). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards with all 16 voice and all 16 data TNs provisioned, the.
24 System architecture 2 segments per Superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 5). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards with no data TNs enabled, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8Do9AA Message Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8D15AA Tnmk Cards, the 2 segment per superloop configuration will provide a virtual nonblocking (120 Timeslots to 32-128 TNs) environment (see Figure 2).
System architecture 25 4 segments per Superloop In this configuration, 4 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 6). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAAMessage Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 4 segment per superloop configuration will provide a medium concentration (120 Timeslots to 64-256 TNs) environment (see Figure 2).
26 System architecture 8 segments per SUperlOOp In this configuration, 8 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 7). ln cases where the segment is populated with NT9IO2AA Digit& Line Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAAMessage Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 8 segment per superloop configuration will provide a high concentration (120 Timeslots to 128-512 TNs) environment (see Figure 2).
System architecture 27 Figure 7 8 segments per Superloop configuration .._ .:.y;- _T. ,, ..:+ I I,.. . .. _:, : -:: : ..T .
28 System architecture 1 segment per Superloop segmenis per Superloop In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop and an additional 3 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 8). This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the single segment served by the fiist Superloop and a medium concentration of TNS to Tiieslots for the 3 segments assigned to the additional Superloop, as described in the preceding examples.
System architecture 29 2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop and an additional 6 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 9).
30 System architecture Figure 9 2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop configuration System overview 553-3001-100 c
System architecture 31 Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment consists of peripheral controller cards which provide the timing and control sequences for peripheral circuits, analog and digital line and trunk cards, which provide the interfaces for terminal devices, and circuit cards which provide Digital Trunk Interface (DTI),and Primary Rate Access (PRA) services.
32 System architecture with minimum time delay and low phase distort&, a requirement for the proper transmission of data signals. Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) In a local operating environment, the peripheral equipment may be housed up to 50 feet from the common equipment. The RPE feature extends this range to approximately 70 miles between local and remote facilities.
System architecture 33 - A new System Monitor has been designed to provide enhanced power, cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. This new System Monitor interfaces to the CPU via a Serial Data Interface card, for intelligent error and status reporting. - Maintenance messages that indicate the location of power faults and status down to the specific Column and Module. - Equipment modules that are truly Universal, in terms of power and cooling.
34 System architecture The choice of which powering scheme to use is determined primarily by reserve power requirements and preferences, and by existing power equipment at the installation site. Figure 10 AC power architecture I UPS Battery Bank I DC RkXXifkI - - w AC inp , ‘ AC POWERED SYSTEM fgg Required i -- 0 Optional (with reserve power ) 1 ,.--,-.. ,:,..: .i .
System architecture 35 Figure 11 DC power architecture DC POWERED SYSTEM (with reserve power) System overview 553-3001-l 00 .
36 System System architecture overview 553-3001-l 00 z..
37 Product description Universal Equipment Modules The Meridian 1 System is comprised of Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs), each containing everything needed (card cage assembly, power supply, I/O cabling, etc) to support a specific system function. These UEMs are assembled up to four high on a pedestal, to form a column. The pedestal contains a central Power Distribution Unit (PDU), cooling fans, air filters, and a System Monitor circuit.
38 Product description - Common/Peripheral Equipment module (NT8Dll) - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37) - Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13) - - Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47) - InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) - Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) Figure 12 Universal Equipment Modules \ Universal Equipment Univwbsl System overview 553-3001-l 00 Top-P Equipment .
Product description 39 CPU module (NT8D34) The NT8D34 CPU module houses the CPU and Memory cards used to provide system control and storage of data and programs, for the Meridian 1 system option 71. Each NT8D34 CPU module houses one CPU; two are required for the Meridian 1 system option 71. For configuration flexibility the NT8D34 CPU module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules.
40 Product description Figure 13 NT8D34 CPU module -typical configuration - I ! ~CPU/Mem SL-1 CE Module Common Equipment System overview c 553-3001-100
Product description 41 CPU/Network module -(NT6D39) The NT6D39 CPU/Network module houses the CPU and Memory circuit cards used to provide system control and storage of data and programs for Meridian 1 system option 51 and 61. Each NT6D39 module houses one CPU and up to 16 network loops required for each Meridian 1 system option 51 and 61. For configuration flexibility the NT6D39 CPU/Network module is available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option.
42 Product description Figure 14 NT8D39 CPU/Network module -typical configuration ;L-1 CE Module 1 Net System overview 553-3001-l 00 I CPUAkm
Product description 43 Network module (NT8D35) The NT8D35 Network module houses the circuit cards which are used to provide the digital multiplexed network loops of the switch.mg system, along with the control and signalling cards rquired to interface the switching function with the CPU. The NTSD35 Network Module is used in Meridian 1 system option 71 only. The NT8D35 module also supports Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and/or Primary Rate Interface @‘RI) cards.
Product description 45 Common/Peripheral Equipment modute (NT8Dli) The NT8Dll module houses the common, network and peripheral equipment circuit cards for Meridian 1 system options 21A and 21. The NT8Dll CE/PE module is available intwo versions, AC or DC power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules.
46 Product description The NT8Dll CE/PE Mod&e contains 20 card slots which support the following: - slot 1 : FDI - slot 2 : CPU - slot 3: Memory - slots 4-8: Network cards - slot 9: Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card (N’lXD17AA) - slot 10: Network/DTR card (NT8D18AA) (Always configured as SuperLoop 28) - slots O-9: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards only System overview 5!53-3001-100 ..
.-.; :,::, : ,. ,:,_ ,:,:,+ ,.. :( .
48 Product description Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37) The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module uses the new Peripheral Equipment cards only and may be used with system options 21A,.21,51, 61,7 1. With an upgrade assembly the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment modules may be used with all existing systems. The NT8D37 Intelligent PE module is available in two versions, AC or DC power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules.
Product description 49 Figure 17 NT8D37 Intelligent PE module-typical configuration 1 IPE 0 @ LJ II. PE Pwr Sup System overview 553-3001-100 ..
50 Product description Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13) The Peripheral Equipment module uses the PE circuit cards currently housed in PE shelves for the Meridian SL-1 systems. It provides the interface to the system for trunks and stations. The NT8D13 module may only be connected to an ENET (QPC414) circuit card and maybe used in system options 21A, 21,51,61,71 and the Meridian SL-IXT, NT, RT, ST, N, and XN systems.
$ F I ? I I Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card * 5 It-l II 211 -II Iill B I $ ltlt 3 Analog or Dgilial Line Card cr Trunk Card Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card WC659 Peripheral Buffer Card Analog or Dgillal Line Card or TrunkCard Analog or Dgtial Line Card or Trunk Card Analog or Dgflial Line Card or Trunk Card Analog or Dgltial Line Card or TrunkCard Analog or Dgltial Line Card or Trunk Card I I
52 Product description Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47) The NT8D47AA/DC RPE Carrier module is used to extend the Network to PE interconnection distance between local and remote sites. It, 1 accommodates two network loops. The number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the remote site. For configuration flexibility the Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module is available with an AC power option or a DC power option.
Product description 53 Figure 19 NT8D47 RPE Carrier module -typical configuration System overview 553-3001-100 %.
54 Product description InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) The InterGroup module provides a path for the switching of traflic between the network groups in system option 71. Faceplate cables from Segmented Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock (SCG) and InterGroup Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to the InterGroup module. These faceplate cables are accessed from the front of the module. The InterGroup module does not require any power card for operation.
Product description 55 Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) ;:. ..:,=-, I././ ._ I.. ., j! II --.--x..:~:; -. . . . . . The NT6D44 Meridian Mail module houses the circuit cards currently used by the Meridian Mail Option for Meridian SL-1 systems: The NT6D4.4 Meridian Mail module may only be connected to an ENET (QPC4 14) circuit card and may be used in Meridian 1 system options 21A, 21,51,61, 71 and the Meridian SL-1 XT, NT, RT, ST, N, and XN systems.
56 Product description Figure 21 Meridian Mail module -typical configuration MERIDIAN MAIL MODULE NT6D44 .. \ Circuit breakers for Power sup+3 rputer &h / V corsmdr Availabiliiy \ I ,;;;ym Bus Controller Common Equipment NT4RO6M Power St&ply Hard Disk Modules: NT4G5QAG (multiple 155MB-NT6D46AA ncdes) 2OOMBNT6D47AA or 6OMB.
Product description 57 Pedestal (NT8D27AB) The NT8D27AB pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction and houses the power distribution unit, system monitor, blower unit, and fan unit connector. One pedestal is required per equipment column. The pedestal is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 25.50 inches deep by 10 inches high and weighs 30 lbs empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to four tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers.
58 Product description Figure 22 Multi-column system equipped with NTBD49 Expansion kits NT8D49 System overview 553-3001-l 00 Expansion K i t s
Product description 59 NT8D49 Expansion Kit Spacer System overview 553-3001-l 00
60 Product description Meridian 1 system options Several system options are available. The use of the Universal Equipment Modules allows for seamless growth from one option to another by adding or replacing Universal Equipment Modules or card cages.
Product description 61 Table 1 System option 21A specifications Power AC only Typical Number of Ports 160 Maximum Number of Ports 320 Maximum Number of Modules 1 AC Input Voltage 208 V ac Number of CPUs 1 Number of Network Loops l 7 SuperLoops or 12 ENET Loops plus two service loops (Conf/TDS) Cooling Fan in Top Cap Memory 768K Data Floppy Disk Unit Storage Software Generic 1011 Rls 15 Hardware Features No Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor (NT7D15AA) Additional networ
62 Product description Meridian 1 system option 21 The Meridian 1 system option 21 package includes the CEjPE base hardware, 1 Network/DTR card, 1 Conf/TDS card, 1 Floppy Disk Unit (FDU), 2 SD1 paddle boards. The Pedestal and Top Cap assemblies must be added. Figure 25 illustrates a typical configuration with the shaded area showing the base package.
Product description 63 .;. _, ,‘)2;:‘,i, ,’ .” . ..’ ,y -. :, ,-,z Table 2 System option 21 spcifications Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 800 Input 208Vacor-48Vdc Voltage Number of CPUs 1 Number of Network Loops 7 SuperLoops or 12 ENET Loops plus two service loops (Conf/TDS) Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit Software Generic 1011 Rls 15 Hardware Features Standard Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor (NT8D22AB) ;.. ‘:. : 3 .
64 Product description Meridian 1 system option 51 The Meridian 1 system option 51 package includes 1 CPU/Network module, 1 Conference and TDS card, 1 SuperLoop NetworJc card, 2 SD1 paddle boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal assembly and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be added. Figure 26 shows a typical system configuration with the shaded areas showing the base package.
Product description 65 Table 3 System option 51 specifications :, .; ..-:.-‘.,. ‘L Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 1000 Input 208 V ac or -48 V dc- Voltage Number of CPUs 1 Number of Network Loops 16 Cooling Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Software Generic 1111 Rls 15 Hardware Features One Half Network Group, Standard Power Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor (NT8D22AB) ‘:;.
66 Product description Meridian 1 System option-61 The Meridian 1 System option 61 package includes 2 CPU/Network Modules, 2 Conference and TDS cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1 paddle boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal assembly and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be.added. Figure 27 shows a typical system configuration with the shaded areas showing the base package. Figure 27 System option 61 niversal Universal Equipment ~g”“‘&‘~y~~~ . .. .. .. .. r I-:.:~::.
Product description 67 _I‘ , j j Table 4 System option 61 specifications .<. :. 12; :;.‘. ;,:.:;, 1. . ;.._, (,: Power AC or DC Maximum Number of Ports 2000 Input Voltage 1208Vacor-48Vdc Number of CPUs 2 Number of Network Loops 32 Cooling I 1 Fan Impellers in pedestal Memory 768K Storage Media Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Software Generic I1111 Rls 15 I I Hardware Features 1One Network Group, Standard Power Distribution Unit and Contains System Monitor (NT8D22AB) I I I .
68 Product description Meridian 1 system option 71 The Meridian 1 system option 71 package includes 2 CPU Modules, 1 InterGroup module, 1 Network Group assembly, 2 Conference and TDS cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1 cards, 2.Intelligent Peripheml Equipment Modules, 2 Pedestal assemblies and 2 Top Caps. The FDU or MDU assembly must be added. Figure 28 shows a typical configuration with the shaded areas showing the base package. Figure 28 System option 71 System overview C.
Product description 69 Table 5 System option 71 specifications Power Distribution Unit and Contains ‘: :; ... . .: :.: “ C :::‘:.:‘) , _. . - . A, ~ .,.E : .:::.:: ::.
70 Product System description overview 553-3001-l ..
71 List of terms ACD Automatic Call Distribution. ADM Add-On Data Module. AIM Asynchronous Interface Module. ALU Arithmetic Logic Unit. Architecture The interrelationship between the parts of a system. The framework of a system. ASIM Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module. Analog A process which models information in the form of a continuously varying parameter such as current, voltage, or phase.
72 List of terms Analog signal A signal that varies in a continuous manner such as voice or music. An analog signal may be contrasted with a digital signal which represents only discrete states. The signal put out by a data set has both analog .zuid discrete characteristics. ANI Automatic Number Identification. Ampere A unit of electrical current or the rate of flow of electricity which is equal to watts divided by volts.
List of terms 73 CAS Centralized Attendant Service. CASM Centralized Attendant Service, Main. CASR Centralized Attendant Service, Remote. cc Clock Controller. CDR Call Detail Recording. CE Common Equipment. Central Office (CO) The site where the telephone companies terminate customer lines and locate the switching equipment which interconnects those lines.
74 List of terms co Central Office. CPU Central Processing Unit. Common equipment (CE) A hardware subsystem that houses one or more Central Processing Units (CPUs), memory circuits, mass storage devices, and service circuits. Configuration A group of machines (hardware) which are interconnected and are programmed to operate as a system.
List of terms 75 Digital signal A signal made up of discrete, non-continuous pulses whose information is contained in theirduration, periods, and/or amplitude. Directory number The four-digit number or extension given to a Meridian SL-1 telephone set. Also known as DN. DSL Digital Subscriber Loop. DTE Data Terminal Equipment. DTI Digital Trunk Interface. DTR Digitone Receiver. EIA Electronics Industry Association. EMI Electromagnetic Interference. Unwanted electromagnetic coupling.
76 List of terms Frame A distributing frame. The structure on which all distribution and trunk cables into a central office are terminated (attached). Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) Combining two or more information channels into a single transmission channel by assigning each information channel an exclusive frequency band within the transmission channel bandwidth. (See “Multiplex” and “Time Division Multiplex.
List of terms 77 MDF Main Distributing Frame. See “Frame” above. ‘I u ::>;.. : :> ., .>, . ,..:. -“’:;.:: t. a -.; >- 1 ‘I. MF Multi-Frequency; A method of sending numerical address digits between telephone company switching centers coded as two or more frequencies between 300 and 3400 Hertz. MFS Multi-Frequency Signaling. Also means Multi-Frequency Sender. MGS Multi-Group Switch. MSI Mass Storage Interface. MSL-1 Meridian SL- 1. MSU Mass Storage Unit.
78 List of terms ODAS Office Data Administration System; provides a method of retrieving administrative information stored in Meridian SL-1 memory. Office data Office data represents system configuration data, peripheral equipment data, and transient data (temporary) used for call processing. PBX Private Branch Exchange. PCM Pulse Code Modulation, PDU Power Distribution Unit. PE Peripheral Equipment.
List of terms 79 ISDN Primary Rate Interface. Private Branch Exchange PBX; A small telephone switching center enabling a customer’s telephone stations to connect to the public switched network. Private Exchange A private (manual) telephone exchange that provides private telephone service to an organization that does not allow calls to be transmitted to or from the public telephone network. PROPvl Programmable Read-Only Memory.
80 List of terms RFI The disruption of radio signal reception caused by any source which generates radio waves at the same frequency and the same path as the desired wave. RH Relative Humidity. ROM Read Only Memory: Storage system or computer memory that is “burned into” the microprocessor chip and can only be read, not written to or modified. Non-volatile memory. RPE Remote Peripheral Equipment.
List of terms 81 Spare stock size The quantity of spares for a given stock item. Sparing interval The period of time that stocks of replaceable SL-1 items should last without being replenished. Stock confidence level The allowed probability of not being out of stock when the sparing interval of one year is greater than 99. 9 percent. System hardware Hardware configuration.
82 List of terms Trunk A single circuit between two points, both of which are switching centers or individual distribution points. Teletype machine. 2DFi Two-Way Tie, Dial Repeating. Turnaround time The number of days it takes to replace a failed item and to return a useable item to stock. UEM Universal Equipment Module; a modular, self-contained hardware cabinet (or cube) that houses a card cage assembly, its associated circuit packs, power supplies, and I/O panels.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Copyright 0 1990 Northern T&corn All rights reserved. information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 System options 21,51,6.1,71 Installation planning Standard : ; .,.. -... . ‘. .::. :-/ :,“.: i;.: :’ : .
-3 : :.. ““..
,i i.’ d : ! S-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Installation planning Publication number: 553-3001-l 20 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved.
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Installation planning 553-3001-120 ..
iii Preface Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company.
iv Preface Users should ensure for their own protectjon that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. J CAUTION Proper electrical ground connections Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
About this document This section of the Planning and engineering guide deals with planning the environment that the SL-1 (Option 21,51,61, and 71) system will inhabit, including equipment location, commercial power requirements (AC and DC), grounding, and cabling requirements. Most of the considerations for site planning and installation are common for both AC- and DC-powered systems. Where there are differences, these are noted in the applicable sections.
vi About this document - Installation procedures for telephone sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215) - Extended systems installation (553-3001-250) - Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251) - General maintenance information (553-3001-500) - Fat.& clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-I XII software guide for an overview of software architecture, procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed description of all Xl 1 features and services.
About this document vii Related documentatiori The following documents contain information that may be of value during the site planning and preparation process. - 1987. “Maintenance, Testing and Replacement of Large Storage Batteries.” IEEE, Vol. 450: all pages. - 1987. “Design and Installation of Large Lead Storage Batteries.” IEEE, Vol. 484: all pages. - 1981,1982,1983. ANSI/IEEE Standard, Vols. 484,142,81: all pages. (484-1981; 142-1982; 81-1983) - 1984. Gaseous Hydrogen Systems. NBRA, Vol.
viii About this document - Grounded Conductor (i.e.
ix Contents Planning activities 1 The installation outline The Milestone chart 1 4 Researching the requirements General requirements The equipment room environment Environmental factors Temperature and humidity Static electrfcity Vibration Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Dust Lighting Earthquake bracing Structural Air conditioning requirements SL-1 system power options DC-powered SL-1 systems AC-powered SL-1 systems Commercial AC power source Input power specifications Commercial power conditioning
x Contents AC service panel Dedicated versus shared power Auxiliary power requirements Isolated service receptacles Non-isolated service receptacles Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) powering Cabling Cable types Twisted-pair telephone cables 25-Pair MDF cables Twisted-pair shielded cables Interface (l/O) cables UEM cable routing Network to PE cabling Power and ground cables Cable access requirements Fire protection and safety precautions Fire protection and prevention Recommended fire extinguishing systems S
Contents xi Ceilings Walls Between floors Electromagnetic Interference Termination points Distribution frames (EMI) Preparing for delivery Considerations Equipment handling :. : :’ ., 51 5-l 51 52 52 52 55 55 57 precautions Preparing for installation 59 Work orders Equipment room floor plans Cabling plan The installation plan Manuals Preinstallation inspections Equipment room inspections General inspections Reserve power inspections 59 60 61 62 62 62 63 64 64 _ _‘. .c..:. -I--__ ;-f ._,, ::..
xii Contents Installation planning 553-3001-120 .
1 Planning activities The installation outline Since installations differ from site to site, no single overall schedule of predelivery activity will apply in all cases. In each instance, prepare a detailed plan when the site has been selected and the equipment ordered. Use Table 1, “Outline for installation planning, ” as a guide for making a detailed checklist. Use Table 2 for listing the activities that are involved in site preparation. . . . ,‘{;,‘,y :: Installation planning 553-3001-l 20 ..
2 Planning activities _’ Table 1 Outline for installation planning Items Procedures Research Read the requirements identified in this document. Establish equipment environment, air conditioning requirements, floor loading requirements, and other requirements listed in this section. Select a site Check space, location, power and grounding, and delivery issues. Develop the site Produce a detailed checklist. Use this outline as a guide.
Planning activities 3 Table 2 Site planning activities Activities Wform detailed site survey. Determine if building wire needs /erification and gather preliminary customer data. Hold contract review meeting. Prepare project plarl. Hold customer meeting to discuss project plan and division of responsibilities. Hold Construction Phase site survey to prioriiize site development . tasks. Identify environmental, space, power and grounding requirements ant prepare site accordingly. Gather customer data.
4 Planning activities The Milestone chart - Planning and monitoring site preparation activites is easier when you use a Milestone chart. The Milestone chart is a site planning schedule. It shows the sequence of activities necessary to complete a job and will be different with each site. Depending on the complexity of the site, the chart may be more detailed with scheduled due dates for each activity group.
Planning activities 5 Table 3 Milestone chart I Select the site. Plan the equipment room layout. Plan power and grounding, reserve and/or battery requirements. Plan cable requirements. Plan and start renovations to implement equipment room layout. Continue tasks. site construction and renovation Install power, grounding, reserve power, air conditioning, and heating. Install special rigging such as overhead cable racks and distribution frame equipment as required.
6 Planning activities Installation planning 553-3001-120
7 Researching the requirements Knowing the requirements for system installation saves valuable time and energy when the time comes for system delivery. The first step in planning a site, then, is researching those requirements. The purpose of this section is to define the general requirements necessary to plan and develop the site before system installation.
8 Researching the requirements The equipment room environment The environment that the SL-1 operates in and that spare parts are stored in can influence system performance and reliability.
Researching the requirements 9 Table 4 shows the SC-1 operating en?rironment Table 4 SL-1 operating environment Temperature and humidity considerations Equipment rerminals (sets) Absolute O-50’ C (32-122O F), R H 20-80%, non-condensing 3L-1 Gccmmended Absolute 15-30” C (59-86” F) lo-45O C (50-l 13O F) ?H 20 to 55%, RH 20 to 80%, Ion-condensing non-condensing temperature change less than 1 O” C (18” F) per hour Auxiliary (terminals and printers, for example) Refer to specific NTP document or
10 Researching the requirements In addition to proper operating temperaturq and humidity considerations, the SL-1 should be stored and/or transported under the following specifications: Table 5 SL-1 storage/transportation environment Equipment Temperature and humidity considerations Terminals (sets) Absolute -50 to 70” C (-58 to 158O F) R H 5-95%, non-condensing SL-1 Recommended Absolute 1 5-30° C (59-86” F) -20 to 60” C (-4 to 140” F) RH 20 to 80%, RH 5 to 95%, non-condensing non-condensing
Researching the requirements 11 Environmental factors Temperature and humidity High temperatures tend to increase the rate of deterioration of most materials. Temperature fluctuations can cause temporary or permanent changes to equipment which can affect the grade of service. Low humidity conditions can increase the build up of static electricity, while high humidity can have an adverse effect on the performance of disks, tapes, and printers.
12 Researching the requirements Vibration in the office environment should be limited to a frequency range of 0.5200 Hz and a G-force magnitude of 0.1 G (according to the Bellcore Network Equipment Building Systems Generic Equipment Requirements specification TR-EOP-000063). Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) - Sources of EM1 located close to the equipment may have an effect on system operation.
Researching the requirements 13 Lighting Lighting illumination of 50-75 footcandles measured 30 inches (76 cm) above the equipment room floor is recommended. Lighting must not be powered from the equipment room power panel. For large system installations, provisions for emergency lighting in the equipment room should be considered. Direct sunlight in the equipment room should be avoided to prevent the malfunctioning of devices which employ light sensors (magnetic tape and disk units).
14 Researching the requirements These guidelines should beused along with the following tables when estimating air conditioning requirements. Exact requirements should be determined by a qualified air conditioning engineer. El .I CAUTION Proper air conditioning standkds Digital systems require constant power regardless of the level of system activity (idle or busy) and therefore generate heat continuously. Ensure that proper air conditioning standards are met at all times.
Researching the requirements 15 Table 6 continued SL-1 system heat dissipation Heat dissipation Module NT8D35 Network Watts 300 BTU/hr 1020 NTSD13 Peripheral Equipment 300 1020 NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment NTsD47 Remote Peripheral Equipment NT8D36 InterGroup 425 1450 300 1020 0 0 Note: Thermal load (BTUIhr) = Total power dissipation (Watts) x 3.
16 Researching the requirements Sk-l system power options The SL-1 system is available in both AC and DC versions where DC power is connected to the commercial power panel by means of extended power rectifiers or power plants, and the AC power is connected directly to the commercial power panel. If an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) is used in conjunction with the AC SL-1 system, the UPS connects to the commercial AC source and the SL-1 system columns are connected to the UPS.
Researching the requirements 17 DC-powered SL-1 systems DC-powered SL-1 systems, which use direct current UEM power converters, operate at a nominal -48V dc. URMs in a column are fed DC power from the pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU). The pedestal is powered from an external DC power plant The NT7D12AA rectifier rack contains up to three NT6D52AA recitifers which operate from a nominal 120/240 V ac at 30 Amps. This configuration is typically used for Options 21,51, and 61.
18 Researching the requirements AC-powered SL-1 systemsPower converters in SL-1 systems, which use alternating current, operate at a nominal 208/240 V ac. A typical system operating from 208 V using four UEMs will draw 15-25 Amps depending on the configuration. These are fed from a central point in the pedestal; access to these connections is provided and should be used to confirm that the Ihe voltage is within the required range.
Researching the requirements 19 Input power specifications The following tables provide input system power specifications as required for AC power: Table 8 Input power specifications Input Minimum Nominal Maximum Voltage (VAC) at pedestal 180 2081240 250 Frequency (Hz) 47 50160 63 Transient tolerance (See note) Surges Sags Spikes Amplitude Duration 288 V ac 8.34 mS to 50 mS 276 V ac 50 mS to 500 mS 146Vac 8.34 mS to 50 mS 166Vac 50 mS to 500 mS 815 V pk ~4.
20 Researching the requirements Commercial power conditi6ning If the quality of the commercial power source continuously meets the SL-1 system requirements listed in this section, a power conditioner is not required, however, where the commercial power is of poor quality and cannot consistently meet the SL-1 system requirements, a powerconditioner may provide some improvement. k$?j L; :.cT;.:.
Researching the requirements 21 Failure to follow the~grounding proceduresmay result in an installation that is: - unsafe for personnel working on or using the equipment - not protected horn lightning or power transients - subject to service interruptions . - - subject to degraded system performance Commercial power and grounding requirements The commercial power source refers to the main AC utility power feed, for either AC-powered or DC-powered systems.
22 Researching the requirements Isolated ground topology A dedicated Isolated Ground (IG) bus bar is required with this method. This IG bus is located in the AC panel and serves as the ground window. It is used for all AC (green wire) grounds as well as logic returns. It also accommodates a conductor which references to the (+) battery bus in a DC system.
Researching the requirements 23 - In a steel-framed building, the SL-1 ground interface must have a connecting reference to the building steel on the same floor on which it resides (or within one floor). Note: Northern Telecom does not recommend the use of building steel as part of the SL-1 ground system.
24 Researching the requirements Figure 1 Dedicated transformer in isolated ground system Transformer Conduit Meridian SL-1 Service Panel 3nRv J I Isolated Ground Receptacle (\ l%A I I I I I I I I isolated lb Ground Bus l-Hl+rTl-r Note 6 Cadwelded or 2 ALCU Clamps bgic Return ~~~~l~~ing Bus Logic Return Conductor Building Ground , ._s‘::s , ... :6;‘. :’ ::-::G 2: .; : .;. ,, ..
Researching the requirements 25 Notes for Figure 1: Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run between the transformer and the AC panel. Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase 208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conductor. Receptacles: All 120V service drops in the equipment room must have IG type receptacles. Each circuit must have individual hot, neutral, and ground conductors.
26 Researching the requirements Figure 2 Dedicated transformer in non-isolated ground system h Aeridian SL-1 Service Panel Conduit Transformer I 208V Note 5 -Ad Note 4' 30A ’ ; =A Isolated e Neutral Bus ’ 1 ; 15A I / II\ ’ 0 6‘ (Receptacle) - Note 7 Logic Return Equalizing 1, F ’ n--d ___L__ WJIKWCi”’ Note 8 Building Ground 563-3016 Installation planning 553-3001-120
Researching the requirements 27 Notes for Figure 2: Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run between the transformer and the AC panel. Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase 208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conductor. Receptacles: Each circuit must have individual hot, neutral, and ground c conductors.
28 Researching the requirements Figure 3 Shared AC distribution in an isolated ground system SL-1 Related Wiring Contained In Rigid Conduit or EMT el 1.-.I r &Note Neutral bus Isolated from power panel t To LRE Note 6 5539017 Installation planning 553-3001-120 .
Researching the requirements 29 Notes for Figure 3: An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated ground. An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground. An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m) from the building earth reference. Connections to the building earth reference must be either cadwelded or provided with two ALCU clamps.
30 Researching the requirements Figure 4 Shared AC distribution in a non-isolated ground system I I SL-1 Related Wiring Contained In Rigid Conduit or EMT bi!EE!l, , Note 3 -b LRE To LRE Note 6 5633016 installation planning 553-3001-120 ..
Researching the requirements 31 Notes for Figure 4: An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated ground. An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground. An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m) from the building earth reference. Connections to the building earth reference must be either cadwelded or provided with two ALCU clamps.
32 Researching the requirements Auxiliary power requirements Integrated terminals, printers, modems, and data units require local power.
Researching the requirements 33 CabHng This section identifies the various cabling used in the SL-1 system and provides some guidelines for cabling. Equipment placement in relation to cable lengths should be considered and planned for. Depending on your system and future expansion (of PE modules, for example), the cables you choose must be the right length. Cable types All cables must be designated (tagged) at both ends.
34 Researching the requirements Interface (l/O) cables I/O cables are typically 25conductor flat-ribbon or round cables interfaced through RS-232-C connectors. These cables are used to connect data units to printers, host computers, and modems. UEM cable routing Cables may be routed internally in the UEM horizontally in front and at the rear of the card cage, vertically on the right side only and vertically through square holes near the rear of the DEM.
Researching the requirements 35 Cable access requirerients The customer is responsible for supplying all access for station, feeder, and riser cabling including where necessary: - conduit - floor boring - boring all major walls on a particular floor - access into hung ceilings, including removal and replacement of ceiling tiles Fire protection and safety precautions Fire protection and prevention Building, fire, and safety codes establish the degree of protection required for an installation.
36 Researching the requirements conditioning systems should be designed to inhibitthe spread of fire, heat, and smoke from one part of a building to another. Smoke detectors should also be installed. Services such as steam, water, and power should be checked regu.Iarly, and pipes should be inspected for excess condensation,.leaks, and corrosion. If power connections are made beneath a raised floor, waterproof electrical receptacles and connectors should be used.
Researching the requirements 37 Security precautibns and safeguards Existing practices of building security should be extended and improved to provide adequate protection for the equipment. Safeguards such as tamperproof keylock door controls and electrically taped glass doors and windows can be tied into an alarm system. A monitoring unit using closed-circuit television can also be installed.
38 Researching the requirements Installation planning 553-3001-120 .a . : ‘. . .
39 Planning the site Planning the site is an important element to consider when planning the installation of an SL-1. It impacts the installation costs, operation and maintenance and can have an overall effect on system performance.
40 Planning the site Developing the site - After selecting a site, the following items must be considered during site development: - Space and equipment layout requirements - Equipment rmrn accessories - Detailed floor plans and loading requirements - Building cable plans - System wire routing - Cable termination points The equipment room Space and equipment layout requirements differ with each installation, depending upon equipment selected and the available physical area.
Planning the site 41 .: Note: Sample floor plans may .vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. Follow the engineering guidelines as specified in System engineering (553-3001-151). Secondary storage Provide space for the storage of disks, printer paper, printouts, and daily reports within the equipment area. A secure storage room for spare parts is recommended. Similar environmental conditions should be maintained for storage and operation areas.
42 Planning the site - Storage cabinets for spare parts, backup tapes or disks, and printer Paper The floor plan ...>.;,.% Since the space requirements and the overall layout of the equipment room can have an effect on the installation, operation, and maintenance of a system, a detailed floor plan should be drawn up for each site. The floor plan should show the location of utility closets and cross- connect terminals.
Planning the site 43 The weight and dimgnsions of the SL-1 system should also be considered: Table 9 Weight and dimensions of an SL-1 system Assembly item Pedestal Top Cap UEM 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Module stack stack stack stack Weight empty Weight full 4 0 ibs. 1 5 ibs. 5 0 ibs. N/A N/A N/A N/A 7 0 ibs. 1 5 ibs. 130 tbs. 2 1 5 ibs. 3 4 5 ibs. 4 7 5 ibs. 6 0 5 ibs. SiZS width SiZe dipth 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 26 22 22 26 26 26 26 in. in. in. in. in. in. in. Size height in. in. in. in. in.
44 Planning the site Figures 5,6, and 7 show sotie sample equipment room floor plans. These may vary from your own. Figure 5 SL-1 Option 21 equipment room floor plan IX cross connect terminal I 36 in. (915 mm) ~qg~~w , / t 25 in. (65 mm) 1 additional * equipment ‘(such as reserve 1p o w e r s u p p l y o r auxiliarv , , f f / f Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room.
Planning the site 45 Figure 6 SL-1 Options 51 and 61 equipment room floor plan ‘5533020 Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. . .‘.-‘,-~~.
46 Planning the site Figure 7 SL-1 Option 71 equipment room floor plan 553-3021 Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. SL-1 Option 71 may also expand to a second row of Peripheral Equipment modules.
Planning the site 47 Floor loading estimates Floor loading estimates should be obtained in order to plan for proper stacking of modules. (Floor loading is the weight of the system divided by the occupied floor arena Point loading is the local pressure exerted by the system feet on the floor.) Table 10 shows the floor loading estimates for stacking an SL-1 system. The estimates given represent a fully-loaded module complete with pedestal, maximum circuit pack alIowances, power supplies, and cables.
48 Planning the site The building cable plan - The building cable plan should be divided into zones. The zones are typically the termination point of conduits throughout the office. Each zone on the building cable plan should be identified with a letter or number, and a block of numbers should be assigned to each zone. Be sure to leave room for expansion. See Figure 8 “Sample building cable plan” for an illustration of zoning.
Planning the site 49 - A random sampling of in-place wiring’is taken during a site survey to ensure that it meets specifications for high-speed lines. :: ..,r :: .:. . . - When telephone cable is run in conduit, that conduit must not be used for any other wiring. The location of conduits and floor ducts, for example, should be known. ~. .:.
the site 50 Planning Figure 8 Sample building cable plan ZONE ZONE I Each Zone Approximately 6CG600 sq. ft. - I I - ZONE I P ---m-B 1 - ZONE . I B - B - - - - l - - - - - 6 z h 8 Installation planning 5!53-3001-120 L.
Planning the site 51 Wire routing The routing of all wires for the SL-1 must be specified as part of the plan. To plan wire routing, establish the start and end point of each cable relative to the location of telephones in the office. Remember that each modular jack (8-pin or 6-pin, for example) must be within 8 feet. (2.4 m) of the telephones. At this point the construction of the office must be investigated to determine the best wiring routes.
52 Planning the site Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Data degradation may occur if wires travel near strong sources of electomagnetic interference. See “The equipment room environment” in this document for common sources of interference. Termination points Once the routes for the wires have been determined, the termination points for the these wires must be decided.
Planning the site 53 Table 11 Sample cable record CABLE RECORD I iiiii I I I I I sOR-.
54 Planning the site Installation planning 553-3001-120
55 Preparing for delivery The route the equipment must take from the receiving area to the installation area must be studied in advance. The route should be measured to ensure problem free delivery of the equipment.
56 Preparing for delivery In addition, here are some questions to consider when preparing for delivery: - Has a request been made for equipment delivery? - Is a list of all equipment ordered available on site? - Are transportation arrangements to premises completed? - Is assistance available to prepare the switchroom? From unloading area to equipment room - Are unloading/unpacking facilities available? - Are unloading/unpacking tools available? (pallet jack, for instance) - Is there access to and from unlo
Preparing for delivery 57 Equipment handling precautions The following general guidelines should be followed when handling SL-1 equipment: 1:; ‘; - . ., ‘I -‘.‘-+ :, _ _ _ _ . ._ . ._. .,^. ,.._ ,’ - Circuit packs, disks, and tapes are very sensitive to s.tatic discharge; all static electricity should be discharged-from the body prior to handling.
5 8 Preparing for delivery Installation planning 553-3001-120 -. ‘. : .. : _ ‘.
59 Preparing for installation The following items should be provided at the time of installation: - Work orders - Equipment room floor plan - Building cable plan - Installation, Administration and Maintenance Manuals, and User Guides - Installation plan - Delivery equipment (pallet jack, for instance) - Unloading/unpackaging instructions Work orders The Work order may include: - Terminal Number (TN) assignments - Directory Number @N) assignments - individual terminal, data unit feature assignments - term
60 Preparing for installation Equipment room floor plans The equipment room floor plans should show the location of: - each SL-1 module, power module, and future expansion module (UEM) - a reserve power unit (if applicable) - maintenance and administration terminal and printer (if equipped) and printer locations (if applicable) - the cross-connect terminal - the AC panel and outlets - any cable racks - miscellaneous external equipment (data units, modems, etc.
Preparing for installation 61 Cabling plan - The cabling plan should show: - cable routing and designation information - location of peripheral devices and pr$rters (if applicable) - directory numbers (DNs) assigned to each peripheral device and Office Data Administration System (ODAS) designators (if the software package is equipped) - features available to each terminal - type of cable or wiring to each terminal, printer, and PC - location of cross-connect terminal - location of conduits, floor ducts,
62 Preparing for installation The installation plan - The installation plan may consist of a floor plan, a cabling plan, and an ITS (Installation and Test Sequence) chart, The chart shows typical installation tasks, the sequence of the tasks, and task start and duration information.
Preparing for installation 63 Equipment room inspections An equipment room inspection ensures that the following conditions are met: - physical and environmental requirements met - system power and utility outlets installed and tested - lighting installed and working - AC power distribution installed according to Northern Telecom specifications - equipment room is dry, clean, and ready for installation - equipment locations have been marked on the equipment room floor - entranceways, doorways, halls, and e
64 Preparing for installation General inspections General inspections ensure that the following conditions are met - building cross-connect terminals are provided - conduits or floor ducts to terminal locations are‘installed (including service fittings) - access conduit for raceway is in place - sufficient terminal blocks are provided - sufficient cross-connect yire is provided Reserve power inspections For reserve power inspections if batteries are used, ensure that the following conditions are metz - re
Preparing for installation 65 An Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) isused for reserve power in ACpowered systems. It includes basic and supporting equipment, including rectifier/charger, inverter, controls and instrumentation. A battery bank is a separate item but may be required together with the UPS. The following items should be inspected and signed off prior to starting the installation: - Environmental requirements are metz both operating and storage/transportation.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Installation planning Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Standard -.. .,.. ,j ;; : : r-y :- ..
.. .
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Publication number: 553-3001-151 Document Status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O .. ,. . . ..:.:. ,_,;, ,..._ ,~ . _ .: , 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved.
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard release 1 .
iii About this document General information The following document has been updated to include new naming conventions and system engineering guidelines for the SL-1 System. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses.
iv About this document References See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for - Master index (553-3001-000) - System overview (553-3001-100) - Installation planning (553-3001-120) - - System engineering (553-3001-151) - Power engineering (553-3001-152) - Sparesplanning (553-3001-153) - Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-W) See the list of fine and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index (553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
V Contents System organization and capacities Option 21 Options 51 and 61 Option 71 Universal Equipment Modules CUPE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC) Description of CUPE UEM (NT8Dll AC/DC) CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39WDC) Description of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC) CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC) Description of CPU UEM (NT8D34AA/DC) Network UEM (NT8D35AA/DC) Description of Network UEM (NT8D35AAIDC) Intelligent Peripheral Equipment UEM (IPE) (NT8D37AA/DC) Description of IPE UEM (NT8D37AA/DC) PE UEM (NT8D13WDC) Description of PE UEM (N
vi Contents Definitions - General rules UEM and column designations Configurations Peripherals Traffic distribution Traffic definitions Equipment utilization Network loop traffic Partitioning Network loop assigning PE card distribution IPE card slot assigning Card slot priority Class of service priority Trunks Attendant consoles Telephone sets Card slot assignment Assigning cards Terminal number assigning Ongoing assignment plan Cutover study Threshold study Equipment relief Assignment records 41 Step
Contents vii Step 3 53 Trunks required Example 53 53 54 Step 4 Line, trunk, and console load Line load Trunk load Console load 54 54 54 54 55 Step 5 55 56 56 56 56 57 59 DTR requirements Model 1 Model 2 Model 3 Model 4 Detailed calculation: method 1 Detailed calculation: method 2 60 Step 6 60 Total system load Step 7 61 Network loop requirements Non-blocking configuration with Superloop Network Blocking configuration with Superloop Network Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414) DTVPRI cards 65
viii Contents 68 Step 11 TDWonference loop 68 Step 12 69 Memory 69 Step 13 70 Equipment summary 70 Feature calculations 71 Calculations Calculations Calculations Calculations Example Calculations with with with with Authorization Code Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) Charge Account for CDR Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 71 72 73 74 . . 74 75 with Integrated Message Service (IMS) 77 Worksheets Card distribution 103 Tables 115.-- System engineering 553-3001-151 -, .- . .
l-l System organization and capacities The SL-1 System is basically organized into different kinds of systems and can support from 32 to 10,000 analog or digital lines, depending on traffic and feature requirements. System configurations are determined by customer requirements and the physical limitations of the equipment. Both AC and DC power options are available. The following figures show a high level view of each system configuration.
1-2 System organization Figure l-l Option 21 with multiple UEMs 553-3022 System engineering 553-3001-151
System organization 1-3 Figure 1-2 Option 51 with half network group 553-3023 System engineering 553-3001-l 51 .
1-4 System organization Figure 1-3 Option 61 with full network group 553-3024 System engineering 553-3001-151
System organization l-5 Option 71 Option 71 is a multiple network group machine with redundant CPU and serves from 2,000 to 10,000 lines. See Figure 14. Figure 1-4 Option 71 with multiple network group - t Main UEM Columr 553-3025 Note: This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses.
1-6 System organization Universal Equipment Modtiles This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses. Each configuration of the SL-1 consists of a nuniir of Univ&sal Equipment Modules (UEMs). Each module can be identified by its function.
System organization 1-7 CUPE UEM (NT8h 1 AC/DC) Table l-2 Identification of CUPE UEM (NTBDll Unit AC/DC) Number required per UEM Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (CE/PE Pwr Sup) (AC-NT7D14AA) (DC-NT7D04AA) 1 Floppy Disk Interface card (FDI) (QPC742) 1 CPU card (QPC687) 1 Memory/Peripheral Signalling card (NT8D19AA) 1 NetworkDTR card (NT8D18AA) 1 ConferenceffDS card (NT8Dl7AA) 1 Network cards 16 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) Serial Data Interface Paddle Board (Dual Port) (NT8D
1-8 System organization Description of CE/PE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC) Slots 1,2, and 3 are reserved for the following circuit cards: : - Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) (QPC742) - Central Processing Unit (CPU) (QPC687) - Memory/Peripheral Signalling Card (NT8D19AA) Slots 4 through 9 in the Network area can be used by the following cards: - Superloop Network Card (lVlXDO4AA) serves one superloop (four loops). - Enhanced Network Card (QPC4 14) serves two loops.
System organization 1-9 Slot 10, Net/Corn, must be occupied by the Network/DTR card (NTSDlSAA) which combines the functions of a Network and Peripheral Equipment controller and a Digitone receiver. The card provides ten loops for ten PE cards.
l-1 0 System organization CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC)’ Table 1-3 Identification of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC) Unit Common Equipment Power Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8D29AB) (DC-NTGD41AB) Number-required per UEM 1 Network cards (QPC414) 18 Superloop Network cards (NT8D04AA) ~6 Clock Controller/Serial Data Interface (SDI) (QPC471 /QPC139) 1 Peripheral Signalling card (QPC43) 1 Three Port Extender (QPC441) 1 Mass Storage interface (MSI) (QPC584) or Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) (NT8D68AA) 1 CPU
System organization l-11 Description of CPWNetwork UEM (NTGD39AAiDC) Slots 1 through 8 are reserved for the following cards: - Network cards (QPC4 14 or NT8DO4AA) The rest of the slots contain the following cards: - slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI) - slot 10: Peripheral Signaling - slot 11: Three Port Extender (3PE) - slot 12: Mass Storage Interface (MSI) - slot 13: SD1 - slot 14: CPU function - slot 15: CPU interface - slot 16: Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) - slot 17: Memo
l-l 2 System organization CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC) Table l-4 Identification of Single CPU UEM Unit Number- required per UEM Common Equipment Power Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8D29AB) (DGNTGD41AB) 1 CPU function card (QPC579) 1 CPU interface card (QPC580) 1 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (WA) card (QPC581) 1 Memory cards (QPC583) 2 Mass Storage Interface card (MSI) (QPC584) or Floppy Disk interface (FDI) (NT8D68AA): 1 Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) cards (QPC215) 15 Clock Controller card (QPC471 or
System organization 1-13 Description of CPU UEM (NT8434AAIDC) Slots l-2 are reserved for the following cards: - Memory cards (QPC581) The rest of the slots contain the following c-ards: - slot 3: CMA - slot 4: CPU interface - slot 5: CPU function - slot 6: SD1 - slot 7: MS1 - slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) - slot 13: available - slot 14: Clock Controller _.
l-1 4 System organization Network UEM (NT8D%AA/DC) Table l-5 Identification of Network UEM hit Number_ required per UEM :ommon Equipment Power upply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACIT8D29AB) (DCNTGD41 AB) 1 ‘hree-Port Extender (3PE) slPC4.
System organization l-15 Description of Network UEM (NT8D35AAIDC) The slot assignment of cards is as follows: - slots 1: Three Port Extender (3PE) - slots 2-3: Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for Option 71 only), PRI/DTI, or SD1 - slot 4: Peripheral signaling - slots 5- 12: Network cards - slot 13: PRI/DTI or SD1 - slot 14: PRI/DTI - slot 15: not used Note: This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are ..
l-1 6 System organization Intelligent Peripheral&ipment UEM (IPE)(NT8D37AAlDC) Table l-6 Identification of IPE UEM Unit Number required per UEM Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8DOGAA) (DC-NTGD41AB) AC Ringing Generator (NT8D21AA) (required only when analog cards are present) Controller-2 (Cont-2) (NT8DOl AD) Card or Controller-4 (Cont-4) (NT8DOlAC) Card (See note.
System organization 1-17 Description of IPE‘UEM (NT8D37AA/DC) The NT8D37 IPE backplane (NT8D3701) contains 16 card slots. Slots O-15 are for line cards. Slot 16 is for miscellaneous. The Controller Card is situated near the center of the module, between slot 7 and slot 8. If one or two superloops are to be served, use Cont-3 If three or four superloops are to be served, use Cant-4.
l-1 8 System organization Table l-7 Port-to-line card orientation for IPE (NT8D37hUDC) line cards Line card Ports served Digital Line Card (NT8D02AA) 16 Digital Analog Line Card (NTBD08AA) 16 Analog Analog Message Waiting Line Card (NT8DOSAA) 16 Analog with Message Waiting features Universal Trunk Card (NT8D14AA) ZG 8 trunks with any combination of CO/DID/RAN/Page Digitone Receiver Card (NT8D18AA) 8 channels of DTMF or MF receivers E&M Trunk Card (NT8Dl5AA) I 4 trunks with any combination of E
System organization l-19 PE UEM (NT8D13&DC) Table l-8 Identification of PE UEM (NTBD13AAIDC) Number required . -per UEM Unit Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE Pwr Sup) (AC-NTBDOGAA) (DC-NTGD41 See note. 1 AB) AC Ringing Generator (Rng Gen) (NT8D21 AA) (required only when analog cards are present.
l-20 System organization RPE UEM (NTBD47AtiDC) Table l-9 identification of RPE UEM Unit Number Number per UEM perJtPE loop Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (CPE Pwr Sup) (NT7D14AA) 1 1.5Mbps Converter cards (QPC62) 2 1 2Mbp.
System organization 1-21 Description of RPE UEM The slot assignment of cards is as follows: - slot 1: PRI/DTI (optional) - slot 2: 1.5 Mb converter - slot 3: 2 Mb converter - slot 4: carrier interface - slot 5: remote peripheral - slot 6: local carrier buffer - slot 7: carrier interface - slot 8: 2 Mb converter - slot 9: 1.
1-22 System organization InterGroup UEM (NT8D36AA) Figure l-5 InterGroup 0 I I-I I UEM IGSO Ial IGSl IGS 0 J,3 (m> Jlacm) 4(m)& (m)Jqo 4 0 J15(-)J*‘,(w) 2 Jll II-- 512 J17c~3~ 0 I 0 I I c”““) 0 I I I 553-3026 Description of InterGroup UEM The NT8D36AA InterGroup UEM provides a path for the switching of --traffic between the network groups in the system.
System organization 1-23 .’ System capacities Network terminating capacity The Superloop Network Card (NT8DO4AA) has four network loops grouped as one superloop. One superloop can serve up to, two Intelligent Peripheral Equipment UEMs (IPE) (NT8D37AA/DC).
1-24 System organization Configuration capacities The maximum configuration capacities of the SL-1 Options 51,61, and 71 are: - 100 customers - 30 steps in a hunting group - 8191 speed call lists per system - 4095 ringing number pickup groups per customer - 5 12 trunk routes per customer - 254 members per trunk route - 4 listed directory numbers per customer (DID only) - 1 lamp field array per customer, may be repeated once on other console or SL-1 set - 150 lamps per array (all numbers to be consecutive
2-1 Definitions General rules Apply the following rules for system engineering when arranging various Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) within an SL- 1. Note: This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses. UEM and column designations Columns of Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) are numbered from 0 to 63. The column with CPU 0 is Column 0.
2-2 Definitions through the I/O panels or EM1 filters. In addition, all vertical routing of the internal signal cables should be done on the right side of a column. The InterGroup UEM should be located at the top of a column and adjacent to the CE UEMs. Peripheral Equipment (PE or IPE) UEMs may be located away from CE and CPU UEMs by a maximum network cable length of 45 feet. This means that typically at floor level the CE UEM serving its PE cannot be more than 20 feet apart.
Definitions 2-3 Peripherals One superloop (the equivalent of four regular loops) should serve two, four, six, or eight segments. A segment is one-fourth of the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)(NT8D37AA/DC) shelf containing four slots. A superloop can serve from one segment to two IPE UEMs in increments of one segment, depending on the ratio of TN to TS. Preferably, a superloop should be configured to serve an even number of segments.
2-4 Definitions Traffic distribution The traffic distribution in the SL- 1 is illustrated in Figure 2-1. This illustration is valid when considering individual customer or system traffic.
Definitions 2-5 - Line=IT+OO+IOT+IOO where: Line IT 00 IOT 100 = = = = = Line traffic in CCS Incoming Terminating traffic in CCS.
2-6 Definitions Equipment utilization Equipment is provided and maintained throughout the SL-1 location life at an 85% utilization level. Network loop traffic The recommended traffic level for a Network superloop is: - 3500 CCS without Digitone-using apparatus - 2975 CCS with Digitone-using apparatus The traffic level per netwcrk loops depends on whether or not the Peripheral Equipment uses Digitone trunks. Partitioning The SL-1 can be configured as a partitioned or non-partitioned system when .
Definitions 2-7 Network loop assigning When assigning the loop number in systems equipped with two Network UEMs, the load should be distributed evenly across both UEMs. Loops should be assigned in the order shown in Table 2- 1. Record the loops used in Worksheet L provided at the end of this document. . The total number of Peripheral Equipment UEMs should be distributed over the total number of voice and data loops. Normally, one PE UEM is assigned to a superloop.
2-8 Definitions PE card distribution Using Worksheet M (provided at the end of this document), determine the total number of each type of PE cards (500, SLl, TRK, DTR, etc.) per PE UEM. Using Worksheets N and 0 (also provided at the end of this document), determine the number of Multiple Appearance Groups (MAG) assigned to each loop. (Also refer to Worksheet S for a Multiple Appearance Group Record sheet). Multiple appearance groups should be balanced over all the loops.
Definitions 2-9 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (.IPE) card slot assigning Card slot priority Input messages from card slots 1 and 0 in each IPE module (card slot 0 in each EPE shelf) are directed to a high priority input buffer.. The input messages from the remaining slots on each -lPE module are directed to a priority input buffer.
2-10 Definitions Attendant consoles Attendant consoles should never be assigned to a high priority card slot. Too many high priority messages from attendant consoles assigned to these card slots can result in delays in output messages to attendant consoles, sets and trunks. Attendant consoles should always be assigned to card slots 2 through 10. A large number of attendant consoles should not be assigned to the same network loop since buffer overflow may result (ERR030 and ERR040 messages on the TTY).
Definitions 2-11 Assigning cards Procedure 2-1 Order for assigning cards 1 Assign cards requiring a card slot 1 assignment (high priority slot). 2 Assign cards for high-usage trunks, such as CO trunks. 3 Assign cards for low-usage trunks, such as paging and dictation. 4 Assign cards for attendant consoles. Note: For the.PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC), card slot 1 is reserved for high priority signaling. For the IPE UEM (NT8D37AA/DC), both card slots 0 and 1 are reserved for high priority signaling.
2-12 Definitions Terminal number assigning Once the cards are assigned to the PE UEMs, the individual units on each card can be assigned. Use Worksheet Q (at the end of this document) to record the Terminal Number (TN) assignments. TN 0000 cannot be used on superloop 0. Therefore, use loop 0 for Enhanced Network or . Conference/IDS Card to avoid wasting a port.
Definitions 2-13 Equipment relief When additional equipment is installed, assignments should be concentrated into the new loop or shelves until the first threshold study. At that time, the loop profile would be updated and a new loading plan developed. At any time when a loop exceeds 500 CCS (based on 85% traffic level), that loop should be suspended from future assignments.
..
Provisioning guidelines Procedure 3-1 Provisioning guidelines Note: To determine the equipment requirements, follow the provisioning guidelines in the order shown below. Worksheets and Tables are all provided at the end of this document. Step 1 Define and forecast growth. Step 2 Estimate ccs per terminal. Step 3 Calculate number of trunks required. Step 4 Calculate line, trunk, and console load. Step 5 Calculate DTP requirements. Step 6 Calculate total system load.
3-2 Provisioning guidelines Step 10 Calculate number of PE UEMs re&rexl. Step 11 Provision TDS/Conference loops. Step 12 Calculate memory requirements. Step 13 Assign the equipment/prepare equipment sutimary. Note: The provisioning methods described in this document are based on a non-partitioned system using the figures provided. The figures are intended as a guide only. The details of each step are given below in the following steps: System engineering 553-3001-151 ..2 .- -.
Provisioning guidelines 3-3 Step 1: Define and forecast growth The first step in provisioning an initial SL-1 is to forecast the growth of the system at the 2-year and 5-year interval in terms of telephone stations. The number of telephones required when the system is placed in service (cutover) is determined by the customer.
3-4 Provisioning guidelines To determine the number of telephones required from cutover through a 5year interval, the number of employees required at cutover 1,2,3,4, and 5 years is multiplied by the ratio of telephones to employee. - 500 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 275 telephones required at cutover - 525 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 289 telephones requiredat 1 year - 552 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 304 telephones required at 2 years - 580 (employees) x 0.
Provisioning guidelines 3-5 .: Step 2: :.ij; / I :7.I . _(L . . . .,y;:.,. -.* -j “-.-. Estimate ccs per terminal CCS per terminal The station and trunk CCS per terminal (CCS/r) for an initial installation of an SL- 1 can be estimated using any one of the following methods. - Comparative method - Manual calculation - Default method Comparative method Three existing systems are selected which have an historical record of traffic study data.
3-6 Provisioning guidelines Table 3-l Example of station, trunk, and intra Customer A cc& averaging Customer B Customer C Total Average 200 250 150- 600. 200 Line CCSrr 4.35 4.75 3.5 12.6 4.2 Trunk CCST 2.6 3.0 2.0 7.6 2.5 lntra CCST 1.7 1.75 1.5 4.95 1.65 Line size If only the trunk CCS/r is available, then multiply the trunk CCS/T by 0.5 to determine the intra CCS/r (assumes a normal traffic pattern of 33% incoming calls, 33% outgoing calls, and 33% intra-system calls).
Provisioning guidelines 3-7 Table 3-2 Example of cc&t averaging when drily trunk c&t are known Trunk Type No. of TN&S Grede of sBrvim Load in CCS No. of T@ltlS CCSIT DID 16 P.01 -294 n 1.2 co 14 P.02 267 234 1.14 TIE 07 P.05 116 215 0.54 Paging 02 10 ccsnrunk 20 207 0.09 Out WATS 04 30 ccwlrunk 120 216 0.54 FX 02 30 ccstnrnk 60 216 d.27 Private Line 04 20 CcsRrunk 60 04 20 TOTAL 9 5 9 azs 23.
3-8 Provisioning guidelines Manual calculation of c&t Normally, the customer can estimate the number of trunks required at cutover and specify the grade of service to be maintained at the 2-year and 5-year period. (If not, the comparative method can be used). The number of trunks can be read from the appropriate trunk&g table to select the estimated usage on the trunk group. The number of lines at cutover that are accessing the group are divided into the estimated usage.
Provisioning guidelines 3-9 This method is used for each trunk group inIhe system, with the exception of small special services trunk groups (Tie Trunks, Wats, FX). Normally, the customer will tolerate a lesser grade of service on these trunk groups. Table 3-3 has been developed which lists the estimated usage on special services trunks.
3-10 Provisioning guidelines Default method Studies have been conducted which estimate the average line CCS/r to never be greater than 5.5 in 90 percent of all businesses. If attempts to calculate the CCS/r using the comparative method or the manual calculation have not been successful, the default-of 5.5 line CCS/r can be used. The network line usage is determined by multiplying the number of lines by 5.5 CCS/r. The total is then multiplied by 2 to incorporate the trunk CCS/r.
Provisioning guidelines 3-l 1 Table 3-4 Defautt Method and Manual Calculations analysis 1 Default Method Manual Calculations Difference Cutover 3025 2863CCS 162 CCS 2 Years 3344 3162 CCS 182 CCS 5 Year5 3872 3657 CCS 215 CCS -: . . ~.‘.YY . . _ .’ -1 I System engineering 553-3001-l 51 -. .
3-12 Provisioning guidelines Step 3: Calculate number of trunks required Trunks required The values obtained through any of the three previous methods should now be entered on Worksheet A (provided at the end of this document). Add your calculations to the worksheet.
Provisioning guidelines 3-l 3 Step 4: Calculate line, trunk, and console load Line, trunk, and console load _ Once the quantity of trunks required has been estimated, enter the quantities on Worksheet A (in Step 1) for the cutover, 2-year and 5-year interval. This calculation must be performed for each trunk group to be equipped. The total trunk CCS/T is the sum of each individual trunk group CCS/r. This value is also entered on Worksheet A. (See Worksheet A at the end of this document.
3-14 ‘hovisioning guidelines Step 5: Calculate DTR requirements Once station and trunk requirements have been determined for the complete system, the Digitone Receiver (DTR) requirements can be calculated. DTR are shared by all customers in the system and should be distributed equally over all the network loops. Tables 6-3 through 6-6 (at the end of this document) are based on models of PBX traffic environments and can be applied to determine DTR needs in most cases.
Provisioning guidelines 3-15 From the appropriate table (See Table.6-3 to.Table 6-6 at the end of this document) determine the number of DTR required and the DTR load for cutover, two-year, and five-year interval. Record this information on Worksheet B (located at the end of this document). The following models are based on some common PBX traffic measurements: Model 1 Table 6-3 is based on the following factors: - 33% intra-office calls, 33% incoming calls, and 33% outgoing calls - 1.
3-16 Provisioning guidelines Detailed calculation: method 1 This method can be used when there are no incoming Digitone DID trunks and the following is assumed: - Receiver traffic is assumed to be inflated by 30% to cover unsuccessful dialing attempts. - Call holding times used in Irma-office and Outgoing Call calculations can be assumed to be 135 seconds if unknown. - Receiver holding times assumed to be 6.2 and 14.1 seconds for intra and outgoing calls respectively.
Provisioning guidelines 3-17 3 Calculate average holding time:. Average holding time = f6.2 x Intra) + (14.1 x outeoing) Intra calls + outgoing calls 4 Refer to Table 6-7 or Table 6-8 (at theend of this document) and use answers from (2) and (3) above to determine the number of receivers required. Detailed calculation: method 2 This method can be used when incoming Digitone trunks are included in the system.
3-18 Provisioning guidelines Step 6: Calculate total system load Total the line, trunk, console, and Digitone receiver load for each customer to arrive at a total load figure for each customer for the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval. Enter this figure on Worksheets B and C (at the end of this document). Step 7: Calculate number of superloops required The system network loop requirement is the total of all individual customer loops and superloops required.
Provisioning guidelines 3-19 Non-blocking configura‘tion with Superloop Network For non-blocking applications (or non-blocking part of the system), provide one superloop per 120 Terminal Numbers (INS). Each line or trunk is one TN except that an integrated voice and data line is two TNs (assuming dam port is configured). Blocking configuration with Superloop Network For applications where blocking is allowed, one superloop can serve up to 512 lines (1024 TNs).
3-20 Provisioning guidelines Table 3-5 Number of DTI cards required when DTl/PRI traffic is known DTIPRI traffic (CCS) Number of DTI cards 1 - 507 1 508 - 1201 2 1202 - 1935 3 1936 - 2689 4 2690 - 3456 5 3457 - 4231 6 4232 - 5006 7 5007 - 5781 8 over 5781 provide 8+ one DTI for each 774 ccs in excess of 5781 ccs. Note: In a Network module, if two network slots are available but not contiguous, the Superloop Network Card or Enhanced Network Card can be moved to create a 2” slot for DTI/PRI.
Provisioning guidelines 3-21 Step 8: Calculate number of Network groups required Compute the number of Network groups based on the total. number of loops required (excluding conference and tone loops). The following equation should be used: (Also refer to Table 3-6.) Total number of loops = 4 x no. of Superloop Network Cards + 2 x no.
3-22 Provisioning guidelines Step 9: Calculate number of PE cards required Enter the number of Digitone receivers required (from Worksheet B) at the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval on Worksheet D. Use a separate worksheet for the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. Using the information on Worksheet A, enter the number of M2xxx TNs, M3xxx TNs, NE-500/2500 TN, SL-1 TN, and trunk TN required at the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval (for all customers).
Provisioning guidelines 3-23 Step 11: Provision YEWConference loops Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) and Conference (CONF) loops are provisioned according to the two-year figure for the number of network loops required. All systems should be equipped with a minimum of two TDS and two CONF loops. Refer to Table 6- 10 (at the end of this document) to determine TDS and CONF loop requirements for systems other than SL-1 S. Enter these figures on Worksheet F (at the end of this document).
_:-
4-1 Feature calculations Calculations with Authorization Code With authorization code, the receiver holding times are changed from 6.2 seconds to 19.6 seconds for intra-office calls, and from 14.1 seconds to 27.5 seconds for outgoing calls. Use these figures in (2) and (3) of Detailed calculation Method 1,‘and (2) of Detailed calculation Method 2 when calculating the DTR requirements for a system with the authorization code option. The following is assumed.
4-2 Feature calculations Calculations with Centralized Attendaht Service (CAS) This method is used to determine the DTR requirements for the main location of a system equipped with the CAS option. The following is assumed: - All attendant calls presented through Release~Link Trunks’ (RLT) from a remote PBX require Digitone Receivers. - The average number of digits dialed is 4. - Average receiver holding time is 6.2 seconds.
Feature calculations 4-3 Calculations with Charge Account for CDR The receiver holding time for outgoing calls changes from 14.1 seconds to 20.8 seconds. Apply this change to (2) and (3) in Method 1 and (3) in Method 2 to determine DTR requirements for a system with the charge account for CDR option. The following is assumed: - 50% of the Digitone outgoing calls require charge account. - The average number of SSP digits is 2 (maximum is 4).
4-4 Feature calculations Calculations with Direct inward System Access (DISA) This method is used when a system is equipped with DISA. The following is assumed: - The DISA calls come through DISA trunks or DID trunks.’ - 75% of DISA calls require security code. - The average number of digits in the security code is 4 (range is 1 tc 8). - The DISA receiver holding time is 6.2 seconds. Procedure 4-2 Calculations with DISA 1 Calculate the number of DISA calls.
Feature calculations 4-5 Calculations with Integrated Message Service (IMS) This method is used when a system is equipped with IMS. The following is assumed: - Only messaging calls from 2500 sets require DigitoneReceiver service - 50-50 split of originating and terminating calls and 135 seconds average call holding time were assumed in Step (a). - 50% of calls from 2500 sets were intra-PBX calls Step (b).
5-1 Worksheets Worksheets 5-l Growth Forecast: Worksheet A Line Usage: Worksheet B Network Loop Calculation : Worksheet C PE Card Calculations : Worksheet D Universal Equipment Module Provisioning : Worksheet E Conference Loop Requirements : Worksheet F Unprotected Memory Calculations : Worksheet G Protected Memory Calculations : Worksheet H Program Store Calculations : Worksheet I Equipment Summary : Worksheet J Balancing Network Loops : Worksheet K Load Balancing : Worksheet L Card Distribution : Works
5-2 Worksheets Worksheet A Growth forecast One sheet for each customer, one sheet for the system as a whole. Customer: OUTWATS Fx Private Line Dial Dictation Paging RAN AIOD DTI E&M 2W E&M 4W c o System engineering 553-3001-151 .d .- -.
Worksheets 5-3 Worksheet A continued Growth forecast Line CCS/r Total Trunk CCS/T Intra CCSjT System engineering 553-3001-l 51 c.
5-4 Worksheets Worksheet B One sheet for each customer for cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. One for the system cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. -year Customer: Address: Line usage M2xxx M3xxx SL-1 500 2500 TN TN TN TN TN ccsfr ccs/T cc&s/r ccs/T ccs/T = = = = = ccs ccs ccs ccs ccs TOTAL LINE LOAD = ccs X X X X X --- Trunk usage TlWlk Route No of TNs Accessing Route CCS/r Per Trunk Route X = ccs X = ccs X = ccs X = ccs System engineering 553-3001-151 c.
Worksheets 5-5 Worksheet B continued TOTAL TRUNK LOAD = CCS Console usage No. of Consoles x 3occcs = Total Console Load Digital Receivers Table #ofDTR Total DTR Load ccs Total Load ‘ccs System engineering 553-3001-l 51 ..
5-6 Worksheets Work!&?et c One sheet for each customer. One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Address: Network loop calculation Total load (CC9 ccs /Loop No.
Worksheets 5-7 Worksheet C continued Table C-l Network groups required at 2 years No. of Network Groups Maximum No. of Voice Loops No DGT Trunks in CCSlLoop 560 500 Wiih DGT Trunks in CCSlLoop 540 485 24 13440 12000 12960 11640 48 26880 24000 25920 23280 72 40320 36000 38880 34920 96 53760 48000 51840 46560 120 67200 60000 64800 58200 Note: The maximum CCS/loop for any SL-1 is 600 CCS/loop when no Digitone Trunks are used or 580 CCS/loop when Digitone Trunks are used. ..:- .
5-8 Worksheets Worksheet D One for the complete system at cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. Y e a r : Customer: Address: Table D-l PE card calculations No. of L ISDgl C 2-YR CUT = No. of DTR = No. of 500 TN 4 = No. of SL-1 TN 4 = No. of Consoles No. of CO/FX/ Wats/Private Link Trunks 2 No. of 2-Wire E&M/DX/Pahuz Trunks 2 System engineering 553-3001-151 I ..
Worksheets 5-9 Worksheet D continued :.: _ (I. :. ./ e..-cd-..... ,.e_,-... -.-=.’ ,*:;.-‘j‘i Table D-l continued PE card calculations CUT No. of LOOD Sienaline/DID Trunks 2 2-YR I 5YR I- . I No. of Dictation Trunks 2 No. of Recorded Announcement Trunks 4 No. of AIOD Trunks . No. of 4-Wire E&M/DX Trunks 2 TOTAL CARDS PE UEM calculations Use the total cards required at 2 years to determine the number of PE UEMs to be provisioned at cutover. PE UEMs required (Round to next highest number) = 8.
5-10 Worksheets Table D-l continued PE card calculations CUT No. of Dgtl LC = Number of digital ports in service + number of TCM consoles x 6 2-YR 5-YR No. of Anlg LCs = Number of analosr ports in service 16 No. of Anlg M/W LCs = Number of analog norts with Message Waiting feature in service 16 No. of XUT = Total number of CO/DID/RAN/PAGE trunks 8 No.
Worksheets 5-l 1 WorksheetE One sheet for the complete system. Customer: D a t e : Address: UEM provisioning (1) Single network group system CPU UEM 1 PE UEM (2) Multiple network group system CPU UEM Network UEM PE UEM System engineering --- 553-3001-l 51 C. : ..: : . .
5-l 2 Worksheets Worksheet F One sheet for the complete system. D a t e : Customer: Address: Conference loop requirements Conference loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop requirements. Conference Loop Required = Tone and Digit loop requirements Tone and Digit loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop requirements. Tone and Digit Loops Required = Estimated real time usage calculation .
Worksheets 513 Worksheet F continued Where: Total Line Load is the 2-year figure T = the average processing time for a call in seconds; use 0.6 for a single network group system, or 0.24 for a multiple network group system 150 = the average holding time 2100 = the maximum useable real time of the CPU in seconds System engineering 553-3001-l 51 ..
5-14 Worksheets Woiksheet G One sheet for the complete system.
Worksheets 5-l 5 Woiksheet G continued Serial Data Interface Cards MF Senders Conference Card Digitone Receivers Low priority Input High priority Input NO-Type Output Buffers SL- 1 Type Output Buffer Total (Add to first page total) Total words (Add to first page total words) System engineering 553-3001-151 c
5-16 Worksheets Worksheet ‘C continued Memory Card Code OPC/NT k words (lk = 1024 Words) Capacity Unprotected Memory Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required System engineering 553-3001-151 ..
Worksheets 5-l 7 iVorksheet H One sheet for the complete system.
5-18 Worksheets Worksheet H continued Total (Include total from third page) Add 10% Total words (Include total words from third page) Memory Card Code Capacity Protected Memory Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required System engineering 553-3001-151 ..
Worksheets 5-l 9 Worksheet H continued One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Datei Table H-l continued Prnterted memnrv calcdatinnn Total Tone and Digit Switch Conference Card History File Total (Add to first page total) Add 10% Total words (Add to first page total words) . / ._ :.. : . . ..I ..I.. :, ; . . _ . . . .. ., . .
5-20 Worksheets Worksheet I One sheet for the complete system.
Worksheets 521 Worksheet I continued Memory Card Code Capacity QPCNr k words (1 k = 1024 Words) Program Store Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required ;_-.: . : ‘._.. :.’ : “.’ System engineering 553-3001-151 .. :. - : ..
5-22 Worksheets Worksheet J Equipment summary One sheet for the complete system.
Worksheets $23 Worksheet J continued One sheet for the complete system. D a t e : Customer: Table J-1 continued Equipment summarv I 5 I I Central Processing Network Groups . . . . . . .,: System engineering 553-3001-151 ..
5-24 Worksheets WorksheetK One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: - Table K-l Balancing network loops over network groups Customer Network Group 0 Network Group 1 System engineering 553-3001-151 C.
Worksheets 525 Work!dleet L One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: _ Load balancing Total system load ccs Voice loops required PE UEMs required Average CCS per UEM =Tatalsystemload= PE UEMs required ccs Average CCS per Loop = Tota1 svstem load CCS = Voice loops required ccs Table L-l Load balancing ;:.-‘,“-.::.: : :‘; :. .:,::.
5-26 Worksheets Worksheet L continued One sheet for the complete system.
Worksheets 527 Worksheet M One sheet for the complete system. Date: Customer: Card distribution Divide the total number of a card type by the total number of BE to arrive at a cards-peNEM figure: UEMs Table M-l Card distribution System engineering 553-3001-151 ..
5-28 Worksheets WorksheetN One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: Table N-l Multiple Appearance Group (MAG) assignments Loop number Loop number MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ool-N MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 500-I-N MAG No. SL-1 TN 500-I-N MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No.
Worksheets 5-29 -Worksheet 0 One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: - Station load balancing Total SL-1 TN to be assigned Less number of SL-1 TN assigned to MAG m Equals number of SL-1 TN not in MAG = TOTAL SL-1 TN not in MAG Number of 500 TN not in MAG assigned per UEM TOTAL 500 TN to be assigned Less number of 500 TN assigned to MAG Equals number of 500 TN not in MAG 500 TN not in MAG Number of 500 TN not in MAG assigned per UEM System engineering 553-3001-151 s.
5-30 Worksheets Worksheet 0 continued Total 2500 TN to be assigned Less number of 2500 TN assigned to MAC Equals number of 2500 TN not in MAG 2500 TN not in MAG System engineering 553-3001-151 Number of 2500 TN not in MAG assigned per UEM
Worksheets 531 -Worksheet P Customer: Date: Table P-l Card to UEM assignment Loop number UEM number Table P-2 Card to UEM assignment Loop number UEM number System engineering 553-3001-151 C. .. .- -.
5-32 Worksheets Worksheet .
Worksheets 5-33 -Worksheet Q One sheet for each PE UEM in the system.
5-34 Worksheets Worksheet Q continued DN = Directory Number RTMB = Route Member Number Date: UEM number Loop number Table Q-1 continued TN assignment record Pack pas 4 5 6 System engineering 553-3001-151 C. .
Worksheets 535 Worksheet Q continued Table Q-l continued TN assignment record hop #- U E M # Grp L.
5-36 Worksheets WorksheetR SL-1 system assignment plan Prepared by: D a t e : System: Customer: One sheet for each equipped voice loop.
Worksheets 537 ‘WorksheetS Multiple appearance group record Prepared by: D a t e : System: Customer: Table S-l Multiple appearance group record MAG LP. EXT. I stat. I Set I System engineering 553-3001-151 2.
..
6-1 Tables 6-1 Tables Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 6-l : Trunk Traffic 6-2: Trunk Traffic 6-3: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-4 : Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-5: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-6: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-7: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-8: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-9: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-l 0: TDS and CONF Loop Requirements 6-l 1: Digitone Receiver Provisioning 6-1 6-3 6-5 6-7 6-9 6-l 1 6-l 3 6-15 6-17 6-19 .
6-2 Tables Table 6-1 Trunk traffic (Poisson 1% blocking) TRKS ccs TRKS ccs TRKS ccs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 0.4 5.4 15.7 29.6 46.
Tables 6-3 Table 6-2 Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking) TRKS ccs TRKS ccs TRKS ccs TRKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 7.9 20.9 36.7 55.8 76.0 96.
6-4 Tables Table 6-2 continued Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking) TRKS 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 CCS 320 347 374 401 429 458 486 514 542 571 562 627 656 685 715 TRKS CCS 46 1194 47 1125 48 1255 49 1286 50 1317 51 1348 52 1374 53 1352 54 1441 55 1472 56 1503 57 1534 58 1565 59 1596 60 1627 Note: For trunk System engineering 553-3001-151 TRKS CCS 76 2130 77 2162 78 2194 79 2226 80 2258 81 2290 82 2322 83 2354 84 2386 85 2418 86 2450 87 2482 88 2514 89 3546 90 2578 traffic greater than
Tables 6-5 Table 6-3 Digitone receiver requirements Nok: Refer to Section 3-15 for the Model assumptions for this table. System engineering 553-3001-151 .
6-6 Tables Table 6-4 Digitone receiver requirements Number of digitone receivers Maximum number of digitone line! 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 21 52 90 134 183 235 293 353 416 483 553 623 693 770 Digitone Number of receiver load digitone (CCS) receivers 2 7 15 27 40 55 71 88 107 126 145 166 187 208 1231 Note: Refer to Section 3 System engineering 553-3001-151 -. ..
Tables 6-7 Table 6-5 Digitone receiver requirements 13 14 15 16 548 618 689 762 203 28 229 29 255 30 282 Note: Refer to Section 3-15 for the this table.
6-8 Tables Table 6-6 Digitone receiver requirements Number of digitone receivers Maximum Digitone Number of number of receiver digitone digitone load (CCS) receivers lines 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 18 41 72 109 148 193 240 291 340 391 448 505 562 624 Maximum Digitone number of receiver digitone ‘load (CCS: lines 2 17 683 253 7 18 745 276 15 19 808 299 872 323 27 20 935 346 40 21 1000 370 55 22 23 1067 395 71 24 1132 419 88 107 25 1200 444 26 1267 469 126 27 1337 495 145 28 1405 520 166 1
Tables 6-9 Table6-7 Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds Number of digitone receivers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 0 106 131 157 185 212 241 270 300 339 361 391 422 454 101 125 150 176 203 231 259 288 317 346 377 409 438 91 120 144 170 196 223 250 278 397 335 365 396 425 94 116 140 165 190 216 243 271 298 327 356 386 414 91 113 136 161 185 211 237 264 292 310 348 378 405 89 111 133 157 182 207 233 259 286 313 342 371 398 2 9 19 33 49 68 88 10
6-10 Tables Table 6-7 continued Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 . 14 15 Number Of digitone receivers 0 487 517 550 583 615 647 680 714 746 779 813 847 882 913 947 981 1016 1051 1083 1117 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 System engineering 553-3001-151 C.
Tables 6-11 Table 6-8 Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds 16 1 17 1 18 ( 19 ( 25 D Number Of digitone receivers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 192 190 189 18 30 45 62 80 100 121 142 165 188 211 236 260 286 312 337 364 2 4B 1’7 2!3 44 6( 3 71 3 97 111 3 131 3 16( 3 18: 3 20( 5 23( 3 251 27! a 30: 5 32! a 35’ 5 L System engineering 553-3001-151 -.
6-12 Tables Table 6-8 continued Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds 19 18 17 16 20 21 0 10 0 0 ’ 402 431 458 486 514 544 573 603 631 660 690 720 751 782 813 341 872 902 934 965 3919 42 7 4544 4 8 :2 5113 53! 9 56! 9 5918 62i5 6 5 :5 6 8 :5 7115 7415 77t 5 80 7 83!5 8615 89t 5 92 7 95:1 396 424 451 478 506 535 565 594 622 651 680 710 740 771 801 829 859 890 921 952 393 421 448 475 503 532 561 590 618 646 676 705 735 766 7% 824 854 884 914 945 39 41’ 44 47:
Tables 6-13 Table 6-9 Digitone receiver requirements (Poisson 0.1% blocking) Number of digitone Number of digitone System engineering 553-3001-151 ..
6-14 Tables Table 6-10 Network group capacities Number of network groups Maximum number No figitonetrunks of 744 I 560 I 500 voice loops CCS per loop Digitone trunks 720/5401485 CCS per loop 1 1 24 17850 / 13440 / 12000 17280 / 12960 / 11640 2 48 35700 / 26880 / 24000 34560 I25920 / 23280 3 72 53550 I40320 I36000 51840 138880 / 34920 4 96 71400 / 53760 / 48000 69120/51840/46560 5 120 89250 I67200 I 60000 86400 / 64800 / 58200 Note: This table is based on an 85% utilization level.
Tables 6-15 Table 6-10 TDS and CONF loop requirements ..: .._.*: _..-I. _;: !,;z‘+ .f ,.., ;; -.’ ..’ .,:.
6-16 Tables Table 6-l 1 Digitone receiver provisioning (assumes 1 l-second holding time) I I I I I I I I 70-89 go-111 11/L-121) 11,l 1’12 134-157 158-182 183-207 208-233 234-259 260-286 287-3 13 314-342 343-371 3 r)rmIL-3YU Plnn 399-427 428-456 457487 488-515 516-545 546-576 577-607 608-638 639-667 668-698 699-729 I I I I ! 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 I I I I I -continued- I System engineering 553-3001-151 920-9s 1 952-984 985-1017 1018-1050 1051-
Tables 6-17 Table 6-11 continued Digitone receiver provisioning (assumes 11-second holding time) I I DTR CCS 1751-1785 1786-1820 1821-1855 1856-1890 1891-1925 1926- 1960 1961-1995 DTR ports 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 1996-2030 69 2171-2205 74 2766-2800 2801-2835 2X36-2870 91 92 93 1 DTR CCS 2871-2905 2906-2940 294 l-2975 2976-3010 3011-3045 3046-3080 3081-3115 DTR ports 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 I 3116-3465 101 I I 1 System engineering 553-3001-151
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Standard, release 15
SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Publication number: 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 Product release: Xl 1 release 15 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: December 20,1989 0 1984 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 C.
ii Revision history December 1989 Standard, release 1.0. This Publication is reissued as the Standard version for Relaes 15. Changes are marked with R15.
... Ill Contents General Memory description 3 Memory Generic 711 (S and MS) Memory Generics 811 and 911 (N and XN) Memory Generics 1011 (ST) Memory Generics 1111,1211, and 1311 (NT, XT, and RT) Templates 5 5 5 5 6 Memory calculations 9 Package dependencies Program store requirements Unprotected data storage requirements Protected data storage requirements ..-_ 1 0 11 85 115 List of terms 163 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 .. :.
iv Contents Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
1 General This Appendix provides memory information relating to the SL-1 Integrated Services Network (EN). Engineering and assigning of equipment (553-2201-151) provides provisioning information and the associated data worksheets for a complete system. For Generic Xl 1, Engineering and assigning of equipment (5532201-151) directs the user to this Appendix for specific memory c&.&ion information. Apply this information in worksheets G, H, I of that document for the machine types in Table 1.
2 General Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 .. .: .- -.
3 Memory description Software and office data are stored in a read/write Random Access Memory (RAM). The RAM is organized into modules of 128K, 192K, 256K, 512K or 768K by 16bit words, or 24-bit words for NT, RT, and XT machines in Release 12 and later. Memory size depends on the features programmed into the machine and the number and type of stations served. The memory module pack(s) are mounted in the CE shelf. The following table shows the .. valid hardware configuration for the various SL-1 systems.
4 Memory description Table 2 QPC memory module packs per systemMemory size MS/S 128K 1 - 478 l-479 1 - 479 192K 1 - 423 l-426 1 - 426 256K 2 - 478 2-479 2-479 N XN NT/FIT XT ST OR 1 - 674 l-426 1 - 478 + + 1 - 479 l- 479 384K 2-426 2-426 512K 1 - 672 1 - 672 320K 576K 3-426 768K 4 - 426 1536K 1 - 673 1 - 583 1 - 583 1 - 583 2 - 583 2304K 3 - 583 Note : 1K = 1024 words.
Memory description 5 Memory Generic 711 (S and MS) The memory requirements for a Generic 7 11 system consists of a Read Only Memory (ROM) circuit pack and RAM circuit pack(s). The memory system is divided into pages. The unprotected and protected data stores are usually assigned to pages 0 and 1. The bottom 8K words of page 2 are replaced with the QPC486 ROM pack. The remaining top words of page 2 are assigned to program store.
6 Memory description The ROM for Generic 1111; 1211, and 13 11 is contained in a QPC579 CPU Function Unit. Templates A template is a map of the pattern of keys/features assigned to a telephone, The protected data structure for the SL- 1 NE-500/2500 and digital telephones is based on the concept of shared templates.
Memory description 7 (c) Use Overlay 20 of 553-300140 to m&ntain a current list of all templates defined in the system. Consult this list whenever service change of telephones is to be performed. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 ..
8 Memory description --- Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 ..
9 Memory calculations The memory requirement for Xl 1 Generic must be calculated individually using the following tables: Table Storage 3 Software Program 4 Unprotected Data 5 Protected Data Record the memory requirements on worksheets G, H and I and add thisdata to the other completed main practice worksheets to compile the total provisioning data for the SL- 1 system.
10 Memory calculations Note 2:The memory calculations for the RT (1311) machine are the same as for the NT (1111) machine type. The absence of Generic release indicator R4, R5, or R7 in the Version column indicates the storage words for the associated program applies to all Generic releases. Package dependencies Each Generic contains a basic feature group (always provided) to which optional features can be added.
Memory calculations 11 Table 3 Software program storage requirements Program (1K = 1024 words) Resident (Basic) : ! :L.-,T i ,.., -.. : .:. ,‘,,.:_j; _,-. .: ,.; .
12 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements Program (1K = 1024 words) Read/Write Firmware (continued) Storage in KS Version 711 R4-10 711 R12-13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12-15 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-10 911 R12-14 111 l/121 1 R8-10 1111/1211 R12-15 0.74 0.36 0.34 0.35 0.35 0.39 0.55 0.40 0.77 0.77 Note 1 0.96 Note 1 Comments - (Note 1) - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 s. :.: : x: .: ..
Memory calculations I 3 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program UK = 1024 words) Overlay Area Version Storage in KS 10.58 15.74‘ 16.46 16.92 16.96 17.12 18.07 10.75 11.00 15.58 16.46 16.94 17.42 17.43 18.07 10.75 20.51 11.00 15.58 16.46 16.94 17.42 17.43 18.07 25.41 20.51 16.46 17.42 26.14 27.10 10.60 30.
14 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgWll (1K = 1024 words) OF-IF CUST AIOD Storage in KS Version 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l 1011 R15 1111/1211 9.19 6.38 711 R4-12 711 R13 811 R4-8 811/1011 R9-12 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 R4-5,8-12 911 R7 911 R13-14 111 l/121 1 R8-12 1111/1211 R13-15 0.88 0.91 0.88 0.88 0.91 0.87 0.86 0.90 0.65 0.66 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -.. I 3 All Releases 17.67 12.
Memory calculations 15 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) CDR _.. :, ‘... .:‘;;.:;:: :;:: I. .,, ..s. ,.,! -I Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 RS 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13-14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 111 l/121 1 R12 111 l/121 1 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 1.77 1.80 1.94 1.99 2.
16 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) CDR TTY Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 RS 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4,5 811 R7 811 R8 811 R9 811 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13-15 911 R4,5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-15 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 0.56 0.57 0.59 0.71 0.72 0.99 1.07 1.16 0.56 0.59 0.
Memory calculations 17 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) CDR CLNK Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7-9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 Sll/lOll R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4 0.56_ 0.59 0.66 0.69 0.81 0.56 0.59 0.59 0.66 0.69 0.81 0.89 0.56 911 R5 911 R7-9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 1 R14-15 0.57 0.59 0.66 0.70 0.82 0.90 0.46 0.51 0.
18 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Version PrOgEUU Storage iu KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) RAN 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 Rll 1111/1211 R13-14 1111/1211 R14 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 .. 1.34 1.34 1.36 1.
Memory calculations 19 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) TAD DNDI requirements (continued) Storage in KS Version 711 R4-5 0.71 711 R7-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9-12 81 l/1011 R13-15 911R4-5 911 R7-12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8-12 1111/1211 R13-15 0.72 0.76 0.71 0.72 0.72 0.76 0.72 0.73 0.77 0.54 0.
20 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) EES Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7-8 81 l/101 1 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO Sll/lOll R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12-13 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l - continued - Memory calculations 55
M e m o r y calculations Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) requirements Version 21 (continued) Storage in KS 711 R4-9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-8 81 l/1011 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO 81 l/1011 R12811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 1.54 1.56 1.59 1.65 1.53 1.53 1.55 1.58 1.64 1.66 1.52 1.52 1.51 1.53 1.57 1.62 1.64 1.74 1.17 1.19 1.21 1.
22 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program UK = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS 711 R4-12 711 R13 811 R4-8 81 l/101 1 R9-12 811/1011 R13-15 911 R4-12 911 R13-14 111 l/121 1 R8-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R15 0.20 0.22 0.20 0.20 0.22 0.19 0.22 0.16 0.17 0.18 Comments _ - continued - . ., . -. . . ..._ .., . ..,. .? i;; . : . . . 1 ,:., .I :i’ , Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 C.
Memory calculations 23 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) BRTE _ .,_ ‘-.--_ .,. .’.._. ,y,;’ : .., : Version Storage in Ks Comments 4.95 5.48 5.61 5.68 5.74 5.86 6.81 7.00 4.95 5.47 5.61 5.68 5.74 5.86 6.81 7.00 7.19 4.87 5.39 5.52 5.59 5.65 5.77 6.71 6.93 7.12 7.86 6.34 4.46 4.55 5.30 5.01 5.15 5.
24 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Storage in KS Version Program Comments (1K = 1024 words) RPE 711 R4-9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R4-8 811/1011 R9 Sll/lOll RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13-156 0.99 1.00 1.02 1.00 1.00 1.01 1.03 1.02 0.98 1.00 1.01 0.77 0.78 0.
Memory calculations 25 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) MSB Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - 0.08 0.10‘ 0.13 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.13 0.19 0.08 0.09 0.10 0.13 0.19 0.21 0.07 0.09 0.13 0.15 Comments .
26 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) progr~ (1K = 1024 words) ss25 Version Storage in KS 711 R8 711 R9-10 711 R12 711 R13 811 R8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 81 l/1011 R14 911 R4-5,8-10 911 R7 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 RS-10 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.61 0.62 0.64 0.67 0.72 0.61 0.60 0.63 0.66 0.71 0.96 0.49 0.50 0.49 0.53 0.71 Comments - r ; ::.::.I’-::.: : .
Memory calculations 27 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) DDSP Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12-13 811 R4 811 RS 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 111 l/121 1 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 1.81 1.82 2.10 2.11 2.47 2.98 3.37 1.81 1.82 2.10 2.
28 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program UK = 1024 words) ODAS Version Storage in KS 711,811/1011,911 711,811/1011,911 R9 711,811/1011,911 RlO-12 711,811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13-15 - continued - Memory calculations s. 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 1.12 1.22 1.21 1.22 1.22 1.20 0.72 0.88 0.96 0.94 0.
Memory calculations 29 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) DI 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8-9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 Sll/lOll R9 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 81 l/101 1 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8-9 911 RlO 911 R12-13 911 R14 0.58 0.61‘ 0.63 0.65 0.68 0.67 0.58 0.61 0.63 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.57 0.59 0.62 0.62 0.67 0.
30 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Version hOgGUll Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) DISA 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8-10 711 R12-13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12-13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-8 911 R9-10 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-10 111 l/121 1 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14-15 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.32 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.27 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.34 0.32 0.34 0.35 0.22 0.26 0.23 0.
Memory calculations 31 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) CHG Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9-12 911 R13 911 R14 111 l/121 1 R8-10 1111/1211 R12 0.24 0.29 . 0.34 0.35 0.37 0.24 0.29 0.34 0.35 0.37 0.38 0.24 0.28 0.33 0.34 0.37 0.38 0.25 0.26 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14-15 0.27 0.28 Comments . ._ - continued - .A’,: . :.
32 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version (1K = 1024 words) CAB 3AUT Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5-9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5-8 811/1011 R9 8 1 l/101 1 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5-7 911 R8-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 lOllR15 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 1.12 1.14 1.24 1.11 1.12 1.12 1.14 1.24 1.26 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.23 1.25 1.28 0.84 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.
Memory calculations 33 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) prOgMtl Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) CASM 711 R4-5 711 R7-10 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 Sll/lOll R9-10 811/1011 R12Sll/lOll R13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R4-5 911 R7-10 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-10 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 0.14 0.15 0.16 0.19 0.14 0.15 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.22 0.13 0.15 0.17 0.19 0.22 0.23 0.11 0.13 0.14 0.16 0.
34 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) 2ASR Storage in KS Version 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 Sll/lOll R9 811/1011 RlO 81 l/101 1 R12 811/1011 R13 81 l/101 1 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-
Memory calculations 35 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) BQE Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 Rll 711R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 81 l/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 2.05 2.15. 2.27 2.29 2.33 2.42 2.46 2.
36 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) VTRF Version Storage in KS 711 R4-13 811 R4-8 81 l/101 1 R9-15 911 R4-8 911 R9-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9-10 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-15 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.52 0.53 0.44 0.45 0.45 0.38 ZMAC 711 R4-5 711 R7-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9-12 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 R4-5 911 R7-12 911 R13 911 R14-15 1111/1211 R8-15 0.82 0.83 1.00 0.82 0.83 0.83 1.00 0.81 0.83 0.97 1.00 0.
Memory calculations 37 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) NCOS Version Storage in KS 711,811,911,1011 711,811,911,1011 R13 811,911,1011 R14-15 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-12 1111/1211 R13-15 - continued - Comments 0.10 0.08‘ 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.
38 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) ZPRK Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 Sll/lOll RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8-9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 3.41 3.51 3.
Memory calculations 39 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) ssc IMS (UST, UMG) Version Storage in KS 811,911,1011 R14-15 1111/1211 R8-15 711 R4 711 RS 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 Sll/lOll R14-15 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 0.10 0.10‘ 0.08 7.47 7.49 7.59 7.63 7.70 2.80 2.83 3.00 7.47 7.49 7.59 7.63 7.70 2.80 2.83 3.00 3.02 7.36 7.
40 Memory calculations Table 3 ” Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) ROA Storage in Ks Version 711 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-7 911 R8 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-14 1111/1211 R15 0.36 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.40 0.42 0.36 0.10 0.27 0.10 0.11 0.43 0.08 0.08 0.31 Comments . - continued - ..: :, . .‘..-‘.L.., _ 3 .‘.‘-“‘: ,: : J* : :.
Memory calculations 41 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued)’ prOgMIU Version Storage in KS Comments (lK = 1024 words) IWG 711 R4 711 R5-7 711 RS-10 711 R12-13 811 R4 811 R5-7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12-13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R4 911 R5-7 911 R8-10 2.03 2.30 2.32 2.63 2.03 2.30 2.32 2.32 2.63 2.68 1.99 2.26 2.27 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-10 1111/1211 R12 2.65 2.59 2.64 2.69 1.83 2.09 1111/1211 1111/1211 1.97 2.01 R13 R14-15 - continued - .6 .
42 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS MCBQ 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-8 911 R9 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 111/1211 R15 1N S C 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l Comments 2.53 2.56 2.66 2.67 2.68 2.76 2.54 2.57 2.
Memory calculations 43 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) 1 BACD I Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 81 l/101 1 R9 811/1011 RlO 81 l/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811 R14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 Ri3 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 ! i Version :y_:.- ..,. :-,<: .,;--;:.:.
44 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS 711 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-7 811 R8 81 l/101 1 R9-10 ACDB 81 l/101 1 R12 811/1011 R13-14 911 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-10 111 l/121 1 R12 1111/1211 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.05 0.04 0.05 Comments - 0.09 0.12 0.05 0.09 0.12 0.13 0.04 0.09 0.08 0.09 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 ..
Memory calculations 45 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) r PrOgKUU Version Storage in KS (1K = 1024 words) ACDC LMAN Comments 13.54 13.49 . 14.16 14.19 14.75 15.77 16.97 17.99 13.54 13.49 14.16 14.19 14.75 15.77 16.97 17.99 17.98 13.39 13.34 14.01 14.04 14.60 15.61 16.62 17.83 20.87 11.25 11.67 12.46 13.26 12.77 14.
46 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) MUS ACDA Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7-9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5-7 811/1011 R8-10 Sll/lOll R12 Sll/lOll R13-14 911 R4-5 911 R7-9 911 RlO 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.28 1.29 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.29 1.28 1.01 1.02 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 1111/1211 1111/1211 1111/1211 1111/1211 1.03 1.26 1.27 1.39 1.25 0.81 0.99 0.91 0.
Memory calculations 47 Table3 Software program storage requirements (continuedj Program (1K = 1024 words) MWC Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO 1.19 1.24 1.26 1.29 1.38 1.42 1.19 1.24 1.26 1.29 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 811/1011 811/1011 811/1011 811/1011 811/1011 Comments R9 RlO R12 R13 R14 1.38 1.42 1.43 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 .. 1.16 1.20 1.21 1.23 1.26 1.35 1.40 1.41 2.
48 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) AAB Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7-13 811 R4-5 811/1011 R7-14 911 R4-5 911 R7-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9-13 1111/1211 R14-15 0.07 0.11 0.07 0.11 0.07 0.11 0.12 0.08 0.09 0.08 Comments _ - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 I C.
Memory calculations 49 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) GRP requirements Version (continued) Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8-9 711 RlO 711 Rll 711R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 RS 811 R7 811/1011 R8-9 811/1011 RlO 2.19 2.17 2.20 2.22 2.26 2.25 2.29 2.13 2.18 2.17 2.19 2.21 2.
50 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) NFCR LNK Version Storage in Ks 7 11 (before R9) 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 8 11 (before R9) 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13-15 9 11 (before R9) 911 R9 911 RlO 0.29 0.38 0.44 0.46 0.50 0.29 0.38 0.44 0.46 0.50 0.29 0.38 0.43 911 R12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12-15 0.45 0.49 0.23 0.30 0.33 0.
Memory calculations 51 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Storage in KS Version Comments (1K = 1024 words) 9CDD FCA 711 R4-5 711 R7-9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 81 l/101 1 R7-9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 Sll/lOll R13-15 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8-9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-15 2.22 2.23 2.50 2.83 1.50 2.22 2.23 2.53 2.83 1.50 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.50 2.80 1.50 1.85 2.07 2.33 1.03 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l 0 .
52 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) !3R Storage in KS Version 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 Sll/lOll R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 4.13 4.36 4.51 4.87 5.48 5.97 6.19 4.13 4.36 4.51 4.87 5.48 5.
Memory calculations 53 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) AA HIST requirements (continued)’ Version Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 Sll/lOll R8-14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-14 1111/1211 R15 0.55 0.59 0.65 0.64 0.58 0.59 0.65 0.57 0.58 0.64 1.00 0.47 0.73 711,811,911,1011 811,911,1011 R14-15 111 l/1211 R8-15 0.04 0.04 0.03 Comments . - continued - ,. ..._. ‘.: .F ..’ ,::3 .:.:- :, :. :: ., . .
54 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Version Program Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-14 1111/1211 R15 AOP - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 c 0.42 0.54 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.42 0.54 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.64 0.42 0.52 0.60 0.61 0.63 0.80 0.44 0.
Memory calculations 55 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) requirements (continued)’ Version Storage in KS Comments BARS 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 0 All, Releases ?TARS 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 0 All Releases CDP 711,811,911,1011 711,811/101iR13 81 l/101 1 R14-15 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 R14-15 0.07 0.08 0.08 0.09 0.07 0.05 .. PQm 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 0 All Releases FCBQ 711,811,911,1011 1111/1211 1111/1211 R13-15 0.02 0.02 0.
56 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgWIl Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1624 words) NAUT 711 R4-5 711 R7-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 81 l/101 1 RS-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7-12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-10 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 . 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.49 0.50 0.50 0.51 0.55 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.54 0.57 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.40 0.
Memory calculations 57 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) SNR requirements Version (continued) Storage in KS 711 R4-5 711 R7 711 R8-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811/1011 R8-l?, 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4-5 911 R7 911 R8-12 911 R13 0.76 _ 0.78 0.84 0.85 0.76 0.78 0.84 0.85 0.93 0.75 0.77 0.83 0.85 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R8-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 0.92 0.96 0.59 0.60 0.65 0.68 Comments ..
58 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) I’DET Version Storage in KS 711 R4 711 R5-12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5-7 811/1011 R8-12 Sll/lOll R13-14 911 R4 911 R5-12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-14 1111/1211 R15 see 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l m 711 R4-5 711 R7-9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7 811/1011 R8-9 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 Sll/lOll R13-14 911 R4-5 911 R7-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/121
Memory calculations 59 Table3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) ATVN Version 711 711 711 711 711 711 711 811 811 811 Storage in KS R4 R5-7 R8 R9 RlO R12 R13 R4 R5-7 R8 811/1011 811/1011 811/1011 81 l/1011 811/1011 4.99 5.00 5.02 5.03 5.12 5.18 5.25 4.97 4.98 5.00 5.01 5.10 5.17 5.24 5.29 4.92 4.93 4.95 5.04 5.11 5.20 5.25 5.52 3.92 3.93 4.00 4.05 3.80 3.84 3.
60 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Storage in KS Version HOT 711 (before RlO) 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811/1011 (beforeR10) 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 (before RlO) 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 (beforeR10) 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12-13 1111/1211 R14-15 0 0.24 0.26 0 0.24 0.25 0.26 0 0.24 0.25 0.26 0 0.24 0.18 0.
Memory calculations 61 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) requirements (continued) Version Storage in KS ss5 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 0.01 - DRNG 711 R4-5,7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4-5,7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 0.41 0.49 0.48 0.68 0.70 0.58 0.41 0.49 0.48 0.70 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4-5,7 911 R8-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13-15 0.60 0.58 0.40 0.48 0.69 0.57 0.39 0.38 0.
62 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) PBXI Storage in KS Version 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-10 711 R12 711 R13 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R5 911 R7 911 RS 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 111 l/121 1 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 2.84 4.28 4.70 4.82 6.
Memory calculations 63 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) requirements (continued) Version Storage in KS DLDN 711 R5-13 811 R5-7 Sll/lOll R8-15 911 R5-15 1111/1211 R8-13 1111/1211 R15 0.09. 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.06 0.07 4MF 711 R5 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9 811/1011 RlO-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO-12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 1.37 1.
64 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS CSL 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R7 811 R8 811 R9 81 l/1011 RlO 81 l/101 1 R12 81 l/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 111 l/121 1 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 IOD 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 SC1 711 R7-13 Sll/lOll R7-15 911 R7-14 111 l/121 1 R8-15 Comments 13.
Memory calculations 65 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) JCOS Version Storage iu KS Comments 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO-13 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/101 1 RlO-14 911 R7-8 911 R9 911 RlO-12 911 Rl3-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-14 0.22. 0.24 0.25 0.22 0.21 0.24 0.25 0.21 0.23 0.24 0.25 0.17 0.18 0.19 RESDB 811/1011 R14 911 R14 1111/1211 R14 4.30 4.47 7.
66 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Version PrOgEllU Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) CSLA 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 0 0 0 0 lIENANT 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-12 711 R13 811 R7 81 l/1011 R8 Sll/lOll R9 Sll/lOll RlO-12 811/1011 R13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9-12 911 R13 911 1 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 111 l/121 1 R9-12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 FTDS 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -.
Memory calculations 67 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) 3SET Version Storage in KS 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 R12 81 l/1011 R13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R12 911R13 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 BET 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 LNR 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO-12 711 R13 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/1011 RlO-12 811/1011 R13-15 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO-15 Comments 8.70 8.75 8.
68 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS DLT 2 711 R9-13 811/1011 R9-14 911 R9-14 1111/1211 R9-14 PRETRANS 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO-13 811 R8 811/1011 R9 81 l/1011 RlO-13 Sll/lOll R14-15 911 R8 911 RlO-13 911 R14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9-13 1111/1211 R14-15 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.37 0.33 0.34 0.36 0.24 0.25 0.
Memory calculations 69 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Yl-DS Version Storage in KS ZPND 711 RlO-12 711 R13 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 111 l/121 1 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13-15 711 R8-13 81 l/101 1 R8-14 911 R8-14 1111/1211 RS-14 Comments O0 0 0 0.88 0.90 0.88 0.90 0.86 0.88 0.71 0.64 .
70 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS 3GD 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 RlO Sll/lOll R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 11.21 11.51 11.32 11.21 11.51 11.32 11.33 11.09 11.35 11.22 11.54 8.90 9.13 8.26 8.
Memory calculations 71 Table 3 Software program storage Program UK = 1024 words) requirements (continued) Version Storage in Ks MR 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 81 l/101 1 RlO 811/1011 R12 81 l/1011 R13-15 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1111/1111 RlO-15 0.85 0.85 0.89 0.85 0.85 0.89 0.83 0.84 0.88 0.64 Awu 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 RlO 81 l/1011 R12 81 l/101 1 R13 811/1011 R14 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 4.49 4.57 4.62 4.48 4.58 4.
72 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS 3PAO 711 RlO-13 811/1011 RlO-15 911 RlO-14 1111/1211 RlO-15 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 >LC 711 RlO-13 81 l/1011 RlO-15 911 RlO-14 1111/1211 RN-15 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.06 SLP 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 Sll/lOll R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-15 1.11 1.17 1.23 1.10 1.17 1.22 1.23 1.09 1.16 1.
Memory calculations 73 Table 3 Software program storage Program UK = 1024 words) requirements (continued) Version Storage in KS ICDR 711 RlO-13 Sll/lOll RlO-15 911 RlO-14 1111/1211 RlO-15 APL-AUX 711 RlO 711 R12 711R13 811/1011 81 l/1011 811/1011 811/1011 911 RlO Comments 0 0 0 0 4.76 4.77 5.06 4.77 4.77 5.06 5.07 4.69 RlO R12 R13 R14-15 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 RlO-12 111 l/1211 RlO-13 1111/1211 R14-15 4.70 5.00 5.01 3.80 3.70 3.
74 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) NKL ISA ISDN PRA Version Storage in KS 81 l/1011 R12-15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-15 0 0 0 711 R12-13 81 l/101 1 R12-14 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-14 0 0 0 0 Comments . Note 7 for R13 -cnntinlml - g:!,..? .:. _’:.::.;a‘7 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 ..
Memory calculations 75 Table 3 Software program storage Program (1K = 1024 words) requirements (continued) Version Storage in KS IDC 711 R12 711 R13 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 81 l/101 1 R14-15 911 R12 911R13 911 R14 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14-15 AUX ACD-D 711 R13 0 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0 0 0 0.37 0.39 0.38 0.39 0.44 0.37 0.38 0.43 0.20 0.28 0.31 711 R13 811/1011 R13 0.18 0.18 81 l/101 1 R14-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0.19 0.19 0.
76 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) FTC Version Storage in KS 711 R13 811/1011 R13-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0 0 0 0 DT12 811/1011 R14 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 JDMI 81 l/1011 R14-15 911 R14 1111/1211 R14-15 ISDN 711 R13 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R13 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 PRA 81 l/1011 R14-15 911 R14 1111/1211 R14-15 0 0 0 ISL 711 R13 811/1011 R13-15 911 R1
Memory calculations 77 Table 3 Software program storage PrOgGlIll requirements (continued) Version Storage in KS Comm+ts (1K = 1024 words) NTWK SRVC 711 R13 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 ’ 911R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 Rl? 1111/1211 R14 1111/1211 R15 DNXP 711 R13 811/1011 R13-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0 0 0 0 711 R13 811/1011 R13-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0 0 0 0 ISDN AP 711 R13 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-15 0 0 0 0 PR12 811/1011 R14 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211
78 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Storage in KS Version ACNT Sll/lOll R14 911 R14 1011 R15 111 l/121 1 R14 1111/1211 R15 0.61 0.60 0.62 0.43 0.44 A C D Account Package 7 11 R 13 81 l/101 1 R13-14 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R13-14 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.43 - continued - Comments _ _ ,: , .: .“. - . i.;--:,., y:,.. ,,j Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 .. .
Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements 79 (continued) Program Version Storage in KS (1K = 1024 words) Total (base = resident + overlay area + firmware) 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 84.82 87.96 100.67 104.41 107.50 114.00 130.22 141.05 88.24 93.31 105.64 107.95 81 l/101 1 R9 Sll/lOll RlO 81 l/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R4 134.73 119.84 122.81 145.52 165.42 87.
80 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Version Program Storage in KS (1K No. of R/W Modules (base) (Note 2) 711 81 l/101 1 911 1 1 1 1 1111/1211 -continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 (56k) (56k) (56k) (56k) Comments .
Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage Program requirements Version 81 (continued) Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) Overflow (base) (Note 3) 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 Sll/lOll R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 111 l/121 1 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 28.82 31.96 44.67 48.41 51.50 58.00 74.22 85.05 32.94 37.3 1 49.64 51.
82 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) Version Storage in KS Total of All Optional Packages (Note 4) 711 R4 93.
Memory calculations 83 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued). Program Version Storage in KS (1K = 1024 words) Overflow (base + all optional packages). (Note 4) 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 122.63 132.22 172.68 190.70 187.56 220.92 248.51 271.79 126.16 138.11 177.01 195.98 81 l/101 1 R9 811/1011 RlO 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 Sll/lOll R14 911 R4 191.77 225.04 273.69 299.45 397.46 124.
84 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) ROM Version Storage in KS 711 8.0 811/1011 911 8.0 8.0 1111/1211 8.0 Comments - Note I : On XL and XN systems, Read/Write fiiware is represented by the set of High-Level intrinsics. Note 2 :Only 56K of the first program store is available. Note 3 :Overflow into protected data store or page 6,5 and then 1.
Memow calculations 85 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements Version Feature Storage in Words Comments Fixed amount of storage required for system operation. . 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8-14 811 R4 3748 3983 4386 4397 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-15 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9-14 1111/1211 R8-15 3986 4386 3398 4400 5632 5867 6267 6279 6281 7487 3751 For EACH of the following: ..,... -‘ ,..
86 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature 2500 sets Version Storage in Words 711 R12-14 811/1011 R12-15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-15 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 2500 Sets (CFW) 711 R4-7 711 R8-12 811 R4-7 811/1011 R8-12 911 R4-7 911 R8-12 111 l/121 1 R8-12 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 SL-1 Sets (NDD) 711 711 R13-14 811/1011 811/1011 R13-15 911 R4-8 911 R9-12 911 R13-14 1111/1211 R8 111 l/121 1 R9-12 1111/1211 R13-15 14.25 16.25 14.25 16.25 14.25 15.25 16.25 14.
Memory calculations 87 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Add-on K/L Strips Version Storage in Words 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 10 -10 10 10 Comments I. Data Service Access TNs VMS Access ‘INS 7 11 R8- 13 811/1011 R8-15 911 R8-14 1111/1211 RS-15 (Note 15) -hlUkS 711 811/1011 911 111 l/121 1 R8-14 (Note 1) Attendants .
88 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Customers Version Storage in Words 711 R4-7 711 R8-12 711 R13 711 R14 811 R4-7 811/1011 R8-12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4-7 911 R8-12 911 R13 911 R14 111 l/121 1 R8-12 1111/1211 R13 111 l/121 lR14-15 137 152 142 144 137 152 142 144 137 152 142 192 152 142 192 Trunk Routes 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Network-Local 711 R4-14 811 R4 811 R5-7 811/1011 R8-15 911 R4 911 R5-14 1111/1211 R8--15 63 65 66 66 65 6
Memory calculations 89 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirementstcontinued) Feature Junctor Group Pairs (Note 3) Version Storage in Words 711 R4-14 811 R4-7 0 .o 0 74 74 811/1011 R8-15 911 R4-14 1111/1211 R8-15 Peripheral Signaling 711 R4-14 811 R4-7 .. 36 52 52 52 52 811/1011 R8-15 911 R4-14 1111/1211 R8-15 Secondary Tape Comments 711 539154 1 911 5391541 539154 1 811/1011 539154 1 1111/1211 711 R4-5 711 R7-14 811 R4-7 .. (Note 4) -.
90 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words 141 145 143 143 147 143 147 143 147 Comments Conference 711 R4-9 711 RlO-14 811 R4-7 811/1011 R8-9 811/1011 RlO-15 911 R4-9 911 RlO--14 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO--15 Digitone Receiver 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 LPIB 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 4x 4x 4x 4x HPIB 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 4x HPIB 4 x HPIB 4x HPIB 4x HPIB PBXOB 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 4 x PBXOB 4 x PBXOB 4 x
Memory calculations 91 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments ACD 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 (Note 6) ACD Enhancement 711 Sll/lOll 911 1111/1211 (Note 11) Extended Agent Observe 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 1 per ACD POS CMAC NARS/BARS/CDP ..
92 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Call Register Storage in Words 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 RS-9 711 RlO-12 711 R13-14 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811/1011 R8-9 811/1011 RlO-12 811/1011 R13-14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 RS-9 911 RlO-12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO-12 1111/1211 R13-14 1111/1211 R15 CPRK 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 IMS 711 811/1011 911 1011 R15 1111/1211 1111/1211 R15 40 41 44 45 48 61 41 42 45 46 49 62 41 42 45
Memory calculations 93 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements(continued) Feature APL Version Storage in Words 711 179 811/1011 179 911 179 179 1111/1211 TDET 711 811 R4-5 811 R7 10 10 11 11 10 11 11 811/1011 R8-15 911 R4-5 911 R7-14 1111/1211 R8--15 DTI Comments 1perAPLLink 711 (Note 12) ..
94 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Version Feature Multi-Tenant Storage in Words 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 CSL 32 32 32 32 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 _ (Note 16) - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 ..
Memory calculations 95 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature sl-I/DLI Loops Version XJST 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 13 13 13 13 BGD 711 711 R13-14 811/1011 811/1011 R13-15 60 66 60 66 911 911 R13-14 1111/1211 1111/1211 R13-15 60 66 60 66 BGD Disp BGDIAWU Loop Storage in Words 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Comments (Note 17) .
96 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Stnmw in Wnrdc _ _ -_ _ __ uI.,- ..-., --- . . “_ -” rnmmentr V”ur..lr.
Memory calculations 97 Note I : The size of the trunk block is calhlated from: CT + X (words), where: CT = 7 words (3 average card block + 4 trunk timing block) X = (see the following table). Trunk Types Value of X NorXN Other RLA 15 14 AUTOVON 8 8 ADM 14 13 Others 5 5 1 0 (Note) 1 0 (Note) Note: These numbers are for Release 12. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 .. .-... : : .’ ‘. .A.
98 Memory calculations For Release 13 through 14, the size of the trunk block is calculated from: CT + X (words) + Y where: CT = 9 words (5 average card block + 4 trunk timing block) X = (see the following table) Y = 0 if the trunk belongs to a route which does not have CDR or which has CDR with dialed digits. = 9 if the trunk belongs to a route which has CDR with outpulsed digits.
Memory calculations 99 Note 4 : The size of the TI’Y blocks is calculated from: For Releases 4 and 5: 141+ x (words), where: x = 8 for CDR ‘ITYs; 128 otherwise. For Releases 7 through 15: t + x (words), where: t = 16 (size (ITYI@BLOCK) + 128 (TTY output buffer) = 144 and x = the following table Input Buffer CDR link: Data 128 HS link: 128+ 15 APL link: 128+ (179 + PMS Link: 20+ 2 other: Output Q 4) 8 1 I --- Note 5 : The size of the Input/Output buffers is specified in “messages”.
100 Memory calculations Note 6 : For ACD features the following additional storage is required (total for system): (KOx[(K1xCROUT)+(K2xCPID)+(K3xCDN)+CTM+(K4x CRT)] ) + (K5 x CCUST) + (K6 x DN) + (K7 x PID) where the multiplication constants (Ki) are: KO=O if ACD-C package is not equipped, KO=l if ACD-C package is equipped.
Memory calculations 101 K3 =74 size(U_ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=74) for RlO K3 =78 (R12-15) size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=78) K4=25 size (U-ACD-IOAREA) (*25) K5=71 (R4-5) size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15) + size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13) + size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (=43) K5=79 (R7-10) size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15) + size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13) + size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (=51) K5=79 (Rw size (U-ACD-PRINT) (= 19) + size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (= 34) + size (U-ACD-SYS-QJOS) (= 57) K5 = 114 (R13-15) size (U-ACD-PRINT) (= 20) + size (U-ACD-RT
102 Memory calculations K7=29 (Rl3-15) size (U-AC&POS) (= 29) + 2 for DN Expansion + 1 for ACD-ACNT-CODE Kg=48 (Rl3) for NT, RT, and XT systems K8=48 (Rl4-15) for XT, and NT KS=32 (R13-15) for XN, and ST systems and the variables are represented by: CCUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C package CDN = total no. of ACD DNs for ACD-C customers CPID = total no. of AGENT POSITION S for ACD-C customers CROUT = total no. of ACD routes in ACD-C customers CTM = total no.
Memory calculations 103 Note 7 : The unprokcted data store requirements (on a per-customer basis) for NARS/BARS/CDP: 2x(8xRL+6xNCOS)Release4 2 x (12 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 5-8 2 x (16 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 9-12 If FCBQ & OHQ is equipped: 2x(11 xRL+ lOxNCOS)Release4 2 x (17 x RL + 10 x NCOS) Releases 5-8 2 x (21 x RL + i0 x NCOS) Releases 9-12 Releases 13 through 15 If OHQ or MCBQ is equipped: RLSZE + NCOSIZE + QROUTSIZE Otherwise: RLSIZE + NCOSIZE where: RL FUSIZE = number of route lists =2x(45xRL)
104 Memory calculations Note 8 : N, the recommended number of Call Registers is: N = (T + 815)/33.8 + M where: T=A/2xCx1.42-B. M = the number of ACD incoming trunks. A = the total voice loop traffic in CCS. B = M x l(1 is average CCS per ACD trunk). C = the total call register traffic factor The Total Call Register Traffic Factor is equal to 1 + any of the following factors: 0.037 if CDR Charge Account 0.074 if Authorization Code 0.037 if Parallel CDR Ports Per Customer 0.150 if NARS/BARS/CDP 0.
Memory calculations 105 Assumptions: (1) The peak day traffic = 1.42 x ABSBH traffic for business offices. (2) All outgoing calls require authorization (worst case assumption). (3) An additional call register is required for 20 s to hold the authorization code. (4) 50% of outgoing calls use the charge account feature (worst case assumption). (5) An additional call register is required for 20 s to hold the charge account.
106 Memory calculations (17) Music Trunk holding time is 30 s. (18) Average Call Park holding time is 1 min. (19) Average holding time for New Flexible Code Restriction is 4 s. (20) ESN Signalling Feature holding time is 15 s and 35% of calls need signalling feature. (21) The average IVMS call takes 8 s to dial, 15 s ringing, 10 s listening to greeting and 50 seconds leaving message. During the busy hour, 60% of terminating calls are unanswered, of which 50% require IVMS (R4-5).
Memory calculations 107 Note 10 : IMS Unprotected Memory Reqtiirements Release 4: LINK Q TBL HDR = 1 word LINK OQ TBL = 16 words APL REQ TO SENDS = 1 word APL RDY TO SENDS = 1 word APL MONITOR S = 10 words APL MAINTENENCE S = 1 word APL PRINT MODE S = 1 word APL PRT MSG S = 1 word APL PRT PACK S = 1 word MSG MONITOR S = 1 word PACK MONITOR S = 1 word APL INTERCEPT S = 1 word APLILINKSELS=lword APL LINK DATA = 179 words x N QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block Total Unprote
108 Memory calculations Releases 8 through 15: LINK QQ TBL = 16 words / APL LINK DATA = 179 words x N QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block - Total Unprotected (Releases 5 through 14) (16 + (182 x N)) words or (0.016 + 0.178 x N) K words N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block. Total Unprotected (Releasesl5) (16 + (183 x N)) words or (0.016 + 0.178 x IV) K words N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block.
Memory calculations 109 = 66 (for 811 and 911 machines) + 9 = 75 ‘words = 63 (for all other machines) + 9 = 72 words. Note 13 : In Releases 7 through 15, there is no unprotect@ data store impact. Note 14 : Unprotected data store for digital set voice port: Releases 7 and 8 N/XN (words) Others (words) M2009 25.25 24.25 M2018 35.25 34.25 M2112 25.25 24.25 M2317 36.25 35.25 M3000 46.25 45.25 Unprotected data store for digital set data port with Digit Display Class Of Service (COS).
110 Memory calculations Releases 9 through 12 N/XN (words) Others (words) M2009 18.25 17.25 M2018 29.25 -28.25 M2112 20.25 19.25 M2317 36.25 35.25 M3000 46.25 45.25 Unprotected data store for digital set data ports. Note that data ports without digit class of service require one word less than those with digit display. Releases 13 through 15 With Digit Display (size in words) Without Digit Display (size in words) M2009 21.25 19.25 M2018 32.25 30.25 M2112 23.25 21.25 M2317 38.
Memory calculations 11 I Releases 13 through 15 DS/VMS Access TN Preallocated Card 15 Otherwise 16.25 Where a preallocated card is one of the following shelf/cards: O/l - O/7, l/l - 1/8,2/l - 2/8, or 3/8 on a DLI loop. See Note 17. Note 16 : CSL Unprotected Data is comprised of: Per system (with CSL package, Release 8): CSL IQ HDRTBL + Queues CSL OQ HDRTBL CSL MONITOR BLK Total = = = = 3 + (3 x 4) words 16 words 112 words 143 words.
112 Memory calculations Note 19 : Each DCHI consists of the following unprotected data blocks: 1. DCH U BLOCK = 43 words 44forR13andR14 _ 47 for R15 2. Output request buffers = 5 x # of OTBFs 3. Output buffer = 261 words 4. Input buffer = 261 words 5. Unprotected call reference table = 2 + M 6.
Memory calculations 113 Note 21: One bit map table for TCAP per,system. Size of bit map (words)1/16 x number of CBS defined per system Traffic for TCAP4 words per Application ID (1) Note 22 : Bach DTI loop requires the following: DTI-UDATA-LPBLK DTI2-UDATA-CATD 47 words 9 words Note 23: Two words in the attendant unprotected data block per attendant console is required. This is accounted for in the attendant data block size.
114 Memory calculations Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 115 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements Feature Version Storage in Words Fixed amount of storage required for system operation. 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-14 811 R4 811 R5 811R7 811 R8 81 l/101 1 R9-14 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 2981 3077 3253 3249 3250 3109 3148 3253 3305 3306 3379 3460 3568 911 R8 911 R9-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9-14 1111/1211 R15 3620 3621 3461 2981 2982 3092 Comments .
116 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Add-on K/L strips Storage in Words 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 lO/rs lO/rs lO/rs lO/rs _ Data Service Access TNs VMS Access TNs 711 R8-14 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 R8-14 1111/1211 R8-15 remplate Head Table 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 1 1 1 1 remplates 711 R4-5 711 R7-14 811 R4-7 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 R7-14 1111/1211 R8-15 3 + # Entries 4+ # Entries 4 + # Entries 4 + # Entries 4+ # Entries 4+ # Entries rn
Memory calculations 117 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Attendants 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Customers 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9 Sll/lOll RlO 81 l/1011 R12 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7 911 R8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 111 l/121 1 RlO 1111/1211 R12 161 166 181 203 201 207 211 161 166 181 203 201 207 211 161 166 181 203 201 207 211 203 201 207 211 1011 R15 1111/
118 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Trunk Routes Version Storage in Words 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7-8 81 l/101 1 R9 81 l/1011 RlO 81 l/101 1 R12 81 l/1011 R13 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13 31 33 34 35 37 43 50 31 33 34 35 37 43 50 31 33 34 35 37 43 50 34 35 37 43 50 Code Restrictions 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/121
Memory calculations 119 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Peripheral Signaling 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 30 30 30 30 Vetwork Group 711 811 R4-7 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 1111/1211 16 32 32 38 38 Vetwork-LOC 711 R4-5 711 811 R7-14 R4-5 68 70 68 811 R7 811/1011 R14-15 911 R4-5 911 R7-14 1111/1211 70 70 68 70 70 Vetwork-RPE 711 R4-5 711 R7-14 811 R4-5 811 R7 81 l/1011 R8-15 911 R4-5 911 R7-14 1111/1211 71 73 71 73 73 71 73 73 TDS 711 811/10
120 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature MF Sender Version 711 811/1011 2 2 2 1111/1211 2 711 2 2 2 911 Conference 811/1011 911 Digitone Receiver Storage in Words 1111/1211 2 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 8 8 8 8 DN Translator (Note 4) 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 DIG Translator (Note 5) 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 SCL Master Head Table for 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 SCL Head Table 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 Comments _ 1 + Number of List
Memory calculations 121 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Version Feature Storage in Words 711 81 l/1011 911 Comments # SC Lists (Note 6) 1111/1211 3ASMain 711 # Customers 811/1011 911 1111/1211 3ASPemote 711 15 15 15 15 811/1011 911 1111/1211 BARS # Customers .. # Customers 711 811/1011 (Note 7) 911 1111/1211 FTC 711 32 Tables (Note 42) EFTC 7111 32 Tables (Note 44) 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 - continued - # Customers (Note 8) NARS ---:... .i . . ,..
122 Memory calculations Table5 Protected data storage requirements(continued) Feature Version Storage in Words 711 81 l/101 1 911 CDP Comments # Customers (Note.
Memory cakulations 123 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words 370 370 370 370 Comments IMS 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 1 per list (Note 16) NFCR 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 Soft Memory 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 TDET 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 # TDET DTI 711 R4,7-14 811 R5-7 811/1011 R8-15 911 R5,7-14 1111/1211 1 item (Note 18) AMP 711 R4,7-14 811 R5,7 811/1011 R8-15 911 R5-14 1111/1211 1 per customer (Note 17) 35 35 35 35 1 item #
124 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Multiple Office Code Screening Version 711 R4,7-14 811 R5-7 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 1111/1211 M2009 Telephone 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 # telephones (Note 23) M2018 Telephone 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # telephones (Note 25) M2112 Telephone 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # telephones (Note 24) M23 17 Digital Set 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 # ofsets (Note 3 1) M3000 Touchphone 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 #
Memory calculations 125 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version ATM Schedule Block 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 ATM Data Block 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 DLI 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words 12 12 12 12 # ATh4 Routes # DLI Loops (Note 18) ..
126 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments VAS DSDN 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # Customers (Note.30) CPND 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Per system (Note 32) LLC 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 5 5 5 5 Auxiliary Customer 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 187 187 187 187 ISDN PRA 711 R12-14 81 l/101 1 R12-15 911 R12-14 111 l/121 1 R12-15 # PRI (Note 33) ISDN PRA (Note 34) 711 R12 811/1011 R12-13 911.
Memory calculations 127 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments AWU Count 711 811/1011 911 1011 R15 1111/1211 1111/1211 R15 ISL 711 R12-14 811/1011 R12-15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-15 #DCHI (Note 37) ISDN PR12 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 #PRI2 (Note 33)s.
128 Memory calculations No& I : The size of the protected line block for PBX telephones is determined from the following: Basic Line Block 4 words 5 words 6 words 7 words Release 4 Releases 5 through 9 in Release JO in Releases 12 through 15 Basic Line Block (ODAS) 7 words Releases 4 and 5 8 words Releases 7 through 12 10 words Releases 13 through 15 Card Block Component 1.
Memory calculations 129 In addition to the basic line block, each feature requires extra data space as follows: Feature FM-5 Associate Set - Automatic Wake-Up R7-12 R13 R14-15 2 words 2 words 2 words 1 word 1 word 1 word Call Forward Key (4-24 digits) l-6 words l-6 words l-6 words Call Forward by Call Type 2 words Call Party Name Display 1 word + 3 to 13 words 1 word+4to14 words (6-26 characters, 2 characters per word) (6-26 characters, (6-26 characters, 2 characters per 2 characters
130 Memory calculations Feature R46 R7-12 R13 R14-15 Enhanced Hot Line 2-l 0 words (Rl O- (l-31 digits) 2-10 words .
Memory calculations 131 Feature R46 R7-12 R13 R14-15 Stored Number Redial (4-32 digits) I l-8 words l-8 words l-8 wqrds 1-b words System Speed Call User - 1 word 1 word 1 word Tenant Number - 1 word 1 word 1 word Note 2 : The size of the protected line block for SL-1 telephones is determined from the following: Basic Line Block 7 words in Release 4 ‘8 words in Release 5 9 words in Release 7 10 words in Releases 8-13 13 words in Release 14-15 Basic Line Block (ODAS) 10 words Releases
132 Memory calculations In addition to the basic line block requirement, each feahue requires extra data space as follows: Feature R4-5 R7-12 R13 R14-15 ACD Agent Key 1 word 1 word 1 word ACD Display Queue Key 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words ACD Interflow 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words 9 words 11 words 11 words 11 words 2 words 2 words l-6 words l-6 words Key ACD IN-CALLS key ACD Night Service DN Autodial (4-32 Key - 1 word l-8 words digits) Autodial (4-24 Key l-6 words d
Memory calculations 133 Feature CFNA DN R46 1 word R7-12 R13 2 words 1 word R14-15 2 words Conference Autodial l-6 words Conference Hotline 3-l 0 words Conference Speed Call 1 word .’ DIG Key 1 word word 1 word 1 word DN Key 1 word word 2 words 2 words word 2 words 2 words EFD/EHT DN Flash Call Key 1 word word 1 word 1 word Flash Override Call Key 1 word word 1 word 1 word Hot Line I.
134 Memory calculations Feature m-5 Last Number Redial (4-32 R7-12 1 word (R8) R13 R14-15 1 word l-8 words digits) l-8 words (R9-12) Message Center DN 1 word 2 words 2 words Message Registration 1 word (RlO) 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word Park Key 1 word Pretranslation Enhancement Priority Call Key l/2 word (for 255 calling groups) 1 word 1 word 1 word Private Line Key 1 word 2 words 2 words SCI/CCOS/RMS (131 digits) 1 word (RlO- 1 word 14 Signal Key 1 word 1 word
Memory calculations 135 I Feature R45 Speed Call User R7-12 R13 R14-15 1 word 1 word 1 word l-8 words 1-8 words l-8 words Tenant Number 1 word 1 word 1 word Time and Date Key 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words Stored Number Redial Key (4-32 digits) Voice Call Key l-8 words 1 word .
136 Memory calculations In addition to the basic linebloclc, each fea@re requires extra data space as follows: Requirements Feature Autodial Key 8 words 6 words in Releases 7-15) Flash Call Key 1 word (R8-12) Flash Override Call Key 1 word Group DND Key 1 word Immediate Call Key 1 word Paging Key 1 word 2 words in Releases 13-l 5 Priority Call Key 1 word Speed Call Key 1 word Store Number Redial Key 8 words , -2 . . . 4 ‘.: ,j * Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -.
Memory calculations 137 Note 4 : Prior to Rekase 13, the memory requirements for the D&tory Number Translator are (in words of protected data store): (2xS)+AS+12x(l+ Nl+N2+N3) +ADx(~+AIx~)+(DDx~)+SPDN + number of listed DN + 1 per defined DN + 16 (+ 64 withReleases 8and9) (+ 65 with Release 10) (+ 66 with Release 12) if any attendants are defined + 1 if special service prefix defined + 3 per NARSBARS access code defined + 7 if RSANI access code defined + 1 if CAS Hold DN is defined + 2 if CAS RLT DN is def
138 Memory calculations where: S = number of different DN appearing on SL- 1 telephones, 500/2500 telephones mixed with SL- 1 telephones, and private line 500/2500 telephones AS = number of appearance of DN within S Nl = number of different first digit in the numbering plan N2 = number of different sequence of the fast two digits in the numbering plan (if DN is more than 2 digits) N3 = number of different sequence of the first three digits in the numbering plan (if DN is more than 3 digits) N4 = number of
Memory calculations 139 Note 5 : The protected data store requirements for the Dial Intercom feature for each customer using the package are as follows: l+ Gx (l+ 2x M) where: G = number of groups M = number of members in each group Release 14 through 15: (n + 1) + (x x (2 + (~~21) 1 where: n = maximum number of dial intercom groups in Overlay 15 x = actual number of dial intercom groups configures y = average number of members in each dial intercom group Note 6 : The size of a Speed Call List is: ((NB -
140 Memory calculations Speed Call Quick Reference Chart List Size DN Size 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31 1 6 7 8 9 10 Ii 1 2 13 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 10 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 20 25 45 65 85 105 125 145 165 25 30 55 80 105 130 155 180 205 30 35 65 95 125 155 185 215 245 40 45 85 125 165 205 245 290 326 50 55 105 155 205 255 310 360 406 60 65 125 185 245 312 370 340 486 I.
Memory calculations 141 Note 7 : The protected data store requirements for BARS (on a percustomer basis) are: Release 4 137 + 2.73 x (HNPA + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + 1NF’A) + RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4)+ FCAS Releases 5 and 7 137 + 2.73 x (HNF’A + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + INPA) + RLx(8+ 3x:RLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4) + FCAS+ SDRRx(3+ 2xSDE)+ ITGE Releases 8 through 12 16 + SUM+ RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DMEx(3+ + FCAS+ SDRRx(3+ 2xSDE)+ ITGE I/4) .
142 Memory calculations I = the average number .of digits that must be inserted as part of digit manipulation NPA= number of NPA (area codes) in the North American dialing plan lHNPA= number of 1 + NXX in the home NPA of the SL-1 1NPA = number of 1 + NPA (area codes) in the North American dialing plan R= the rate of digits equipped in each level of the tree (translator) RL= the number of route lists RLE= he average number of route lists entries per route list .
Memory calculations 143 129 + 305 = 434 SIZE (ESNJ’RAN-BLOCK) = 1 I This formula is based on the assumption that the IWA/NXX translation tree is half full and distributed evenly. This should represent the typical case. For more precise calculation, use NABS formula. .
144 Memory calculations where: SuIvll = (SUM of network translator 1) suM2= (SUM of network translator 2) SUM= [(lOxR)xxn] -1 11x ____________________________wor& (lOxR)- 1 II= maximum level of tree (n > 0). Al= number of different first digit in network translator 1. A2= number of different sequence of the fist two digits in the non l+ number in network translator 1. A3= number of different second digits in the l+ number in network translator 1.
Memory calculations 145 I= the average number. of digits that must be inserted as part of digit manipulation. LGC= number of on-net or virtual locations. FCAS = (N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[ 4 + (1OOP + 15j/16] where: N = the number of defined FCAS tables M = the average number of NPA codes per table P = the average number of first digit of NXX codes see = Number of entries in the SCC table. SDRR = Number of supplemental digit restricted/recognized blocks defined for NPA, NXX, LGC, SPN.
146 Memory calculations Note 9 : Prior to Release 13, the protected data store requirements for CDP (on a per-customer basis) are: 137+SCx2+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DMEx(3+1/4) Releases 13 through 15 where: SC= number of steering codes RL= the number of route lists RLE= the average number of route lists entries per route list DME= the number of distinct digit manipulation entries .. I= the average number of digits that must be inserted as part of digit manipulation.
Memory calculations 147 Note 10 : The ACD-feature requires.the following additional data store (total for system): For ACD-C not equipped (K~xDN)+(K~xPID)+AID+(K~xCUST) . Simplified (46xDN)+ (12xPID)+ AID+ (3xCUST) For ACD-C equipped [Kl + (K2 x CCUST)] + (K3 x DN) + (K4 x PID) + AID + (K5 x CUST) Simplified [25 + (8 x CCUST)] + (46 x DN) + (12 x PID) + AID + (3 x CUST) where the multiplication constants (Ki) are: K1=25 size (I-ACD-IO-BLK) (=25). K2=8 size (P-ACD-SCHEDBLK) (=8).
148 Memoty calculations K3=57 (R13-14) size (PLACD-BLOCK), (40) + pointer to block from the ACD List (=l) + word offset (ACD-PQS-TN) (=16). K4= 12 size (I-ACD-KEY-DATA) (=l 1) + store for ACD-POS-TN (=l). K4= 14 (Rl3-14) size (P-ACD-KEY-DATA) (= 13) + store for ACD-POS-TN (=l). K5=3 header (ACD-LIST) (=l) + header (ACD-AGENT-ID-TBL) (=2). and the variables are represented by: AID = total no. of AGENT IDS (for the system) CCUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C package CUST = total no.
Memory calculations 149 No& 12 : The protehd store requirements for DISA (on a per-customer basis) are: l+(DNx6) Release 13 through 15 l+(DNx7)-----l+(DNx7) where: DN = number of DISA-DNs. Note 13 : The protected store requirements for Authorization Code (on a per-customer basis) are: ..
150 Memory calculations Note 14 : History file buffeican be 1-64K.per customer option. Note 15 : For System Speed Call List (XL) Head Table: 3 + NB/4 + NB (round NB/4 up) NB (no. of blocks) = EL/EB (round any remainder up) where: EL = entries per list (given), EB = entries per block, 256/?VE (round up remainder) where: WE = words per entry, DNS/4 (round up) where: DNS is DN size (given).
Memory calculations 151 Note 17: New Fletible Code Restriction (NFCR) requires the following memory requirements: 1) A 129 word block that contains: (a) A 128 word table that contains the pointers to the.FRL block for each route. (b) A pointer to the tree root address table. 2) A table that contains the pointers to the NFCR trees. Its length is defined by the maximum number of trees (defined in the customer data block). 3 ) Four words are required for each route that has defined FRL codes.
152 Memory calculations Note 28 : DTI/DLI Protect&l Data Store requirements: Releases 4 and 5 12 words PDD-BLOCK = PAD-TABLE = MISCELLANEOUS = TOTAL= 36 words 2 words 50 words Release 7 = PDD-BLOCK + (N x PADTI-TSETBLOCK) + (T x local network d-1 =18+ (Nx lO)+ (TX 70) Releases 8 through 15 = PDD-BLOCK + (N x PDTI-TSET-BLOCK) + (T + L) x local network data+ (L x (P LOOP DLI + preallocated card data)) = 18+(NxlO)+ [(T+L)x 7O]+[Lx(19+ where: 144)] N = the number of threshold sets T = the number of DTI l
Memory calculations 153 Note 20 : The size of the protected multiple office code screening line block is determined from the following: 2 words for each NXX code defined 2 words for each range defined (maximum_ 20 ranges perlocation code - 80 words pds). Note 21 : Templates are incremented in blocks of 10 words. Note 22 : The trunk block size is 11.5 words with ODAS, or 14.5 words in Releases 10 and 12, or 19.5 words in Releases 13 and 15.
154 Memory calculations Note 25 : Requirements foi voice/data port-are the same as an SL- 1 basic telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires: Before Release 9: (34 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones shariqg the same teniplate. After Release 9: (21+ # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template.
Memory calculations 155 Note 27 : Protected-data store required by .
156 Memory calculations Note 28 : Protected data store requirements for ATM schedule block are as follows: Releases 4,s and 7: 24+((9xNC+l)xNH) Releases S-15: 24+((9xNC+l)xNH)+ 13xAR where: NC = Number of Customers. NH = Number of hours to be scheduled. AR = Number of routes to be tested. .. Note 29 : For all machine types, the additional protected data store for a virtual terminal (DS access TN or VMS access TN) is exactly the same as for an SL-1 set, with one exception.
Memory calculations 157 Note 30 : The protected data store requirement (in words) for VAS Data Services per customer, for each customer that has at least one DSDN, is: = DSDN-VASJBL + (DSDN-LIST x N) 16+ (39 + N) where: N = the number of VAS for which at least one DSDN is defined. Releases 10 and 12 = DSDN-VAS-TRL + (DSDN LIST x N) 16+ (248 x N) Release 14 and 15 = DSDN-VAS-TRL + (DSDN-LIST x N) 16 + (76xN) where: N = number of VAS for which at least one DSDN is defined.
158 Memory calculations Note 32 : Protected data stdre requirements for CPND per system in words is: where: C = number of customers SL = number of non-PBX DNs with or without name defined (including trunk routes, ACD ATIN, and SL- 1) SP = number of single appearance PBX DNs with name defined DIG = number of DIG Groups * = 101 for 2-digit DIG Groups N = Name length NA = number of Names. Note 33 : For each PR loop configured, add 5 words for the P-PREP-BLOCK to the PTERM LOOP-BLOCK.
Memory calculations 159 Note 34 : Each system that has DCHIs shares P-DCH-TBL which has 16 words in length. Each DCHI consists of the following protected data blocks: P-DCHBLOCK = 23 words Releases 13 and 14: P-DCH-BLOCK = 25 words Release 15: PDCH-BLOCK = 26 words Protected call reference table = 1 + (24 x # of PRI loops controlled by DCHI). If DCHI is in PRA mode, add the following: Protected call reference table = 1 + (maximum number of ISL trunks defined) if DCHI is in ISL mode ..
160 Memory calculations A data block of 64 words is allocated for each customer if at least one route is defined to have SID. The structure mapping onto this data block is ISA-SID-RT-LIST. Note 37 : Protected ISL Trunk TN table = l+ maximum number of ISL Trunks defined.
Memory calculations 161 Note 41 : The protected data store requirements for DTI2 is as follows: DTI2-SYSTEM-DATA DTI2-SCAT-NT DTI2-SCTA DTI2-FCADA-NT DTI2J’CADA 9 words 16 words 16 words 16 words 16 words Note 42 : There are 32 pointers to FTC protected structures. Each FTC table has 90 words Note 43 : There are 256 pointers to EFTC protected structures. Each EFTC table has an additional 27 words. Note 44: A bit is required in the customer data block to indicate EBLF allowed/denied.
162 Memory calculations Note 45 : EOW requires the following inRelease 15: per target table per source table per ACD DN 113 words 174 words 6 words The words required for the source table are allocated for every target ACD DN.
Attendant Administration AAB Automatic Answerback ACDA ACD Basic ACDB ACD Advanced ACDC ACD Management Reoprts ACDD ACD Auxiliary data System ACDR AUTOVON CDR AIOD Automatic Identification od Inward Dial AMP Automated Modem Pooling Automatic Number IdentificationANI Route Selection Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 L’
164 List of terms ANIR ANl Route Selection AOP I / Attendant Overflow Position ATVN AUTOVON AUTH Authorization code AWU Automatic Wakeup BACD Automatic Call Distribution-Base BARS Basic Automatic Route Selection BAUT Basic Authorixation Code BCSOB SL- 1 Output Buffer BGD Background Terminal Facility BQUE Basic Queuing BRTE Basic Routing CAB Charge/Authorization Base Package CAS Centralized Attendant Service Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
List of terms 165 CASM CAS Main CASR CAS Remote CCBQ Coordinated Call Back Queuing CCBQCM Coordinated Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains CDP Coordinated Dialing Plan CDR Call Detail Recording CDRE CDR Expansion CDRQ Emergency Acces Enhancement (911 Option) CFCT Call Forward by Call Type CFNA2 Call Fortward No Answer - Second Level CHG CDR with Charge Account CLNK CDR with Magnetic Tape CMAC ESN Communication Management Center CPND Call Party Name Display Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
166 List of terms CPRK Call Park 1 ! CTY CDR TIT CUST Multi-Customer DDSP Digit Display SL- 1 Set DHLD Deluxe Hold DI Dial Intercom DISA Direct System Inward Access DLDN Departmental LDN DND Do Not Disturb DNDG DND Group DNDI DND Individual DNIS Dial Number Identification Service DNXP Directory Number Expansion DRNG Distinctive Ringing Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 c
List of terms 167 DSET Digital Set M2000 DTI Digital Trunk Interface EES END-to-End Signaling EOVF EWnhanced Overflow (NACD) FCA Forced Charge Account FCBQ Flexible Call Back Queuing FTC Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control GRP Groupe Call HIST History File HOT Hot Line Services Enhanced Hot Line Flexible Hot Line IAP3P Integrated Services Digital Network Application Protocol ICDR Internal CDR Records IDC Incoming DID Digit Conversion IMS Integrated Messaging System Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appe
1 6 8 List of terms INTR Intercept ISA Integrated Services Access Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISL Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling Link IVMS Integrated Voice Messaging System LLC Line Load Control LMAN ACD Load Management LNK Auxiliary Processor Link LSEL Line Selection MCBQ Network Queuing - Main MCT Malicious Call Trace MOD Music on Delay MOH Music on Hold MR Message Registration Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
List of terms 169 MSB Make Set Busy MUS Music on Hold MWC Message Center NARS Network Automatic Route Selection NAUT Network Authorization Code NCOS Network Class of Service NFCR New Flexible Code Restriction NSC Network Speed Calling NSIG Network Signaling NTRF Network Traffic NTWK Network Ring Again NXFER Network Transfer occ Other Common Carriers ODAS Office Data Administration System Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 .. ‘..
170 List of terms OHQ Off Hook Queuing OPAO Out-pulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe OPTF Advanced Features PBXI PBX Interface/Digital Trunk Interface PBXOB Non SL-1 Output Buffer PMSI Property Management system Interface PQUE Priority Queuing PRA Primary Rate Access RAN Recorded Announcement RESDB Resident Debug RMS Room Status Service ROA Recorded Attendant Overflow Announcement RPE Remote Peripheral Equipment (1.
List of.
172 List of terms Memory calc&tions 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -.
List of terms 173 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -
SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Q 1984 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard December 1989 Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 System options 21,51-, 61,71 Power engineering Standard
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Power engineering Publication number: 553-3001-l 52 Document status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O .. .-,.:. ,-. 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved.
Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1 .
. .. III About this document This document describes the SL-1 System power and grounding architecture for both AC and DC systems and provides guidelines for calculating system power consumption as well as reserve power requirements.
iv About this document See the SL-I installation a&f maintenance guide for - System installation procedures (553-3001-210) - Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211) - Installation procedures for telephone sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215) - Extended systems installation (553-3001-250) - Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-25 1) - General maintenance information (553-3001-500) - Fault clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardwart replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-I XII sofhvare guide
Contents SL-1 system power overview 1 General information AC or DC powering 1 2 5 AC power system description Input power specifications Internal power distribution External power distribution and ground connections General notes for AC figures .
vi Contents Reserve power 47 AC reserve power DC reserve power 47 53 Engineering and configuration guidelines 57 AC power Internal DC power internal External Commercial 56 56 61 62 63 66 architecture AC power equipment components architecture DC power equipment components DC Power equipment components power and grounding requirements Power conductors Wire size calculation guidelines Examples List of terms Power engineering 553-3001-152 69 69 .71 73 ,.Kiz-.. ..d.. . ,_... ...._,._. -I.-.^.. .
SL-1 system power overview The SL-1 system is an advanced telecommunications system providing state of the art functionality to the customer. The associated power system provides the necessary power for system operation. General information The power system required by the SL- 1 system can be divided into two main categories: external and internal. The external system consists of the power source and power plant which is located outside of the SL-1 system.
2 SL-1 system power overview In discussing these powering schemes, unless otherwise specified, AC distribution will mean a single phase circuit without a neutral conductor, but with an accompanying green wire ground conductor. The nominal voltage is assumed to be either 208 or 240 volts but any voltage within the range shown in Table 1 is applicable. DC distribution is typically a nominal 48 volts at the input to a UEM power converter under load.
SL-1 system power overview 3 Figure 1 AC powered system , I M Required I Chtionnl Figure 2 DC powered system AC b input m Required I Power engineering 553-3001-152
4 SL-1 system power overview Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 -.
:i ,. ../ :.: :.:- 3: :.: : ,._. _... _ “.f. .;::‘r,> --,., .; 5 AC power system description This section describes the characteristics of the Meridian SL-1 system where equipment columns are directly powered by commercial power. The commercial power voltage is brought directly into the Pedestal Power Distribution Unit. From there it is passed through separate wiring to the individual modules in order to provide power to the module power supplies. I.
6 AC power system description Table 2 Transient tolerance Transient tolerance Amplitude Duration (See note) Surges Sags Spikes Notches 288 U ac 8.34 mS to 50 ms 276 U ac 50 mS to 500 ms 146Uac 8.34 mS to 50 ms 166Uac 50 mS to 500 ms 815 Upk ~4.17 ms 815 U pk to ‘408 U pk 4.17 to 8.3 ms to ou ~4.17 mS OUto206U 4.17 mS to 8.3 ms Note: All transients are applied at the peak of the AC waveform. .
AC power system description 7 Figure 3 AC internal power distribution Module. - PDU Module to Module Harness / / Field Wiring Terminal Block SY:. Mon.? Wr.Sup. Power engineering 553-3001-152 ..
8 AC power system description Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) The Pedestal PDU provides the following: - The Field Wiring Terminal Block provides a connection point for the external wiring that is brought into the Pedestal. - The EM1 Filter provides filtering of the wires connecting back to the Utility in order to meet FCC and DOC requirements.
AC power system description 9 Module to Backplane Harness The Module to Backplane Harness provides the power to the AC Power Supplies through the backplane power connector. AC Power Supplies There are three different power supplies that provide power to the Peripheral Equipment, Common Equipment and Common/Peripheral Equipment Modules. In addition, the Ringing Generator provides ringing voltage for the Peripheral Equipment Modules.
10 AC power system description Table 4 Common Equipment Power Supply NT8D29AA Table 5 Ringing output v output A +5.1 V 60A +12v 2.5 A -12 v l.OA Generator NT8021 AA Output VNA Output F 70 V ac/8 VA 25150 Hz 80 V acl8 VA 25150 Hz 06Vaxf6VA 20125 Hz output v Output A - 150v 0.200 A Power engineering 553-3001-152 ..
AC power system description 11 Table 6 Common/Peripheral Equipment Pow& Supply Nl7D14AA output v OuJput +5.1 V 60A +8.5 V 2.5 A +12 l.OA -12 0.75 A +15v 10A -15 v IOA -48 V 4.75 A -150 v 0.13 A output VIVA Output F 86Vacf5VA 20 Hz A External power distribution and ground connections .-_ The external distribution for AC powered systems is very simple. No additional equipment is required; simply connect to an AC source of power.
12 AC power system description Figure 4 Grounding and equalizing nodes -----H--s------- 1 9 Building ground rod EaZh hems: 1. An equalizing node for the Meridian SL-1 system may be obtained through the ACEG the AC panel. ff isolation as per NEC 384-127 (exception 1) cannot be provided, an alternate low impedance connection to the building ground may be required. In either case there are many constraints which must be observed.
AC power system description 13 General notes for AC figures ,: c. ::, :I :, ,, .., i...., .. :.-I ..!, ;:;:: ,“:-:-‘; Permanent connection to Branch Circuit When conduit or a raceway is used it should be metal and regardless of the type, it must contain an insulated ground wire (green), 6 AWG or larger.
14 AC power system description Note: This single point equalizing is reqmred because communication between modules that are not in the same physical line-up would put small amounts of DC on the AC (green wire) ground. Likewise residual AC voltages would be superimposed (longitudinally) on the logic. There is a only a few volts of common mode rejection capability on these lines. Refer also to the System Grounding section later in this document.
AC power system description 15 Multi-column AC powered system A multi-column system (with one or more columns physically adjacent to each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 6. Figure 6 Multi-column distribution AC in AC service panel . 120v receptacle- ! ’ ACEG cord or conduit receptacles Note 1: This LRE may be a simple insulated connector , or if _- preferred, run the LR conductors separately to the ACEG. Power .. engineering 553-3001-152 .:. ::.
16 AC power system description Multi-row AC powered system A multi-row system (with several rows of one or more columns physically adjacent to each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 7. ! Figure 7 Multi-row distribution SL-1 System PE JUNCT CPU ..
AC power system description 17 Extended systems . .‘...’ : ..‘.* _,..:. ,L .: ” p.: y..y+;‘j .\..~...‘:;; ..y-,-*.r, A typical large extended system with both new and existing equipment is shown in Figure 8. Figure 8 External distribution for AC systems AC in SL-1 System H I I II Note 3 + Note -1 +Battery plant --- E iX istir Rect/Dist cabinet (QCA13) Notes: 1. The rectifier cabinet will contain a bus for terminating BRs and LRs, but if the runs are too long, a looal LRE may be needed.
18 AC power system description -.- ,._--._. r.i; .. Power engineering 553-3001-152 .. , .. . .
19 DC power system description This section outlines the characteristics and requirements for the DC auxiliary power that the system is connected to. Input power specifications The DC supply chosen must accect the calculated current drain and operate I. within the following specifications: Table 7 input specifications I Input Pedestal Batlery -40.0 to -56.5 - -42 to -56.5 Expected nominal (with 23 sealed cells) - -51.75 Expected nominal (with 24 sealed cells) - -54.
20 DC power system description Internal power distribution Figure 9 shows the internal DC power distribution elements: - Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - Module to Module Harness - Module to Backplane Harness - DC Power Converters The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to an internal terminal block located in the pedestal. From there, the DC voltage enters the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) which has five circuit breakers, one for each of the four modules and one for the cooling fans.
DC power system description 21 Figure 9 DC internal power distribution I Top Cap I Module to > Module ..: . Internal ..-.:. :/ : --.. > ; : ; : ::...: ..,. Ii ,,.‘/ Field Wiring Terminal Block Y FGND Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 ..
22 DC power system description Module to Module Harness The Module to Module Harness provides the following: - The Module Feed provides the independent power feed to the Modules above itself. - The Module Harness Feed provides the power feed to the Module backplane Harness. Module to Backplane Harness The Module to Backplane Harness provides the power feed to the backplane connector which in turn provides power to the DC Power Converters.
DC power system description 23 The output voltages and currents of the power converters are listed in Tables 8 through 11. Table 8 Peripheral Equipment Converter I NT6D4OAA Output v Output A +5.1 v 28A +8.5 V 4.0 A +lO v -10 v 0.5 A 0.5 A +15 v 17A -15 v l5A -48v 7.7 A Table 9 Common Equipment Converter I NT6D41 AA output v Output A +5.1 v +12 v 60 A 3.5 A -12v l.OA Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 .. : .. .
24 DC power system description Table 10 Ringing Generator Nl7W3AA Output VNA Output. F 7 0 V act1 6 V A 20/25/50 Hz 8 0 V acfl6 V A 20/25/50 Hz 8 6 V at/l 6 V A 20/25/50 Hz output v output A -150 v 0.200 A Table 11 Common/Peripheral Equipment Converter Nl7DO4AA output v output A +5.1 v 5aA +8.5 V 2.5 A +12 l.OA -12 0.75 A +15 v 1OA -15 v 1OA -48V 4.75 A -150 v 0.
DC power system description 25 External power distributioh and grounckonnections The power plants shown in the following ‘figures are typical but there are many variations possible for the item labeled “Rect/Dist” It could be existing customer equipment or a system that Northern Telecom either supplies or recommends. In any case, the rectifier and @tribution equipment are required; the batteries are optional. Note: The NT6D52 Switched Mode Rectifier is a QRF12 mounted within an EM1 enclosure.
26 DC power system description Single Point Ground (SPG) and Isolated Ground Bus (lGB) The SPG in this grounding scheme is the AC Equipment Grounding bar in the AC distribution panel (ACEG). If this bar is insulated from the distribution panel, as is recommended, then it is referred to as an IGB. In the following figures, the preferred methods for using an ACEG and an IGB are illustrated.
D C p o w e r s y s t e m description 27 Figure 10 Multi-column distribution with NT6D52 and ‘QBLl5 AC in AC service 6 AWG BWLR ref AC conduit receptacle(s) NT7Di 2 rack EJofe 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit. BR(+) and LR go to the positive bus bar in the QBL15; BAT (-) connects to the appropriate fuse in the QBL15. hlofe 2: May be run independently to ACEG. ; . . ..: . ._.. ,-“., ‘. c; ,,~ .._:.:.,~,: ,’ Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 ..
28 DC power system description Figure 11 Multi-column distribution with QCA13 SL-1 System :.:.:.:.:.:~<:~ y :$$$$ggg #y .;;;$@ ......... ::$c?~::~.:~& :, _ .:*.:.: . ..,.,. . .....,:.,. . .2‘. .,.:,... . , .y: : . :~&*:+x ~ re-pt=ies\ : :j:i-:i:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: : : #g$.J.,.>:.~:..::..:.:~y.,,.~~.,,~.,.~.,.~~.~ : . ,: : , i%?cw~~ $j$g$p$ AC service panel 120” . A(> in ‘~.~ WA13 RectIDist cabinet Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit.
DC Power system description 29 Figure 12 Multi-column distribution with QBLl2 customer power AC in SL-1 System y 7 .A. . . . . .. . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . < A.. . , . . A . . .: . . . . . . . ... AC service fjanel I 120v receptacle+ ACEG 4 AC conduit Customer: Rectifier/Battery plant Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable endosed in conduit. BFi(+) and LR go to the QBL12 then go to a customer provided LRE. BAT(-) connects to the appropriate fuse in the QBL12.
30 DC power system description Figure 13 Extended systems SL-1 System AC service rianel T 120v receptacles W ’ m ACFr, -1 ,.-a7 Note 1 X-1 \I ~~ -tIIIII 11111 FiAWr, 11 BR/LRE (Ground - ] window) Fa -RecVDist cabinet (WA1 3) Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit. LRE; BAT(-) connects to the appropriate distribution fuse. Note 2: May be run independently to ACEG.
31 System grounding Proper grounding is essential to system operation. The SL-1 system requires a single-point ground. Proper grounding is required for trouble-free operation and for the safety of personnel. The DC resistance of the conductor joining the SL-1 system system ground reference to the main building ground should be as close to zero as possible. The maximum total resistance from an SL-1 System pedestal to the main building ground cannot exceed 0.
32 System grounding Single Point Ground - This system does not, by design, require an isolated AC ground (IG) system (although local codes may require it). The system does require a single point ground (SPG) system. The SPG is needed because several conductors are used as returns. These include battery returns (BR) and logic returns (LR). Logic return is the name used to bring this particular return out of the pedestal.
System grounding 33 like ground system with local ground references like the LRE and ACIG coming together at a main ground window, while small systems tend to use a ground bar or plate for several purposes and it ends up taking on the name of it’s primary function.
34 System grounding Non-isolated ground topology In a non isolated system the AC equipment ground (ACEG) connects to the metal panel, and the associated conduit may also contact various structural metal. This ground alone is not adequate for the SL-1 system. A true SPG system will not be possible, but a dedicated ground conductor which connects to the main building ground is then used for the main ground window to terminate logic returns and reference the (+) battery bus.
Operating power requirements Introduction This section contains: - power consumption data for both circuit packs and full modules - guidelines and methods to help you determine total system power I. requirements, for both AC and DC systems Circuit pack power consumption The power consumption of all currently-supported peripheral equipment circuit cards is given in Tables 12 and 13.
36 Operating power requirements Table 12 NTBD37 Intelligent peripheral equipment’powe; consumption Typical power (Watts) Circuit pack NT8DOl AC Controller-4 3 NT8DOlAD Controller-2 32 NTBD02AA Digital LC 28 NT8D03AA Analog LC 20 NT8DOSAA Analog/t&g Waiting LC 20 NT8Dl4AA Universal Trunk 36 NT8D15AA E&M Trunk 34 NTBD16AA Digitone Receiver 7 2 Table 13 NT8D13 Peripheral equipment power consumption Circuit pack Typical power (Watts) QPC71 F 2.5 QPCl92B 12.0 QPC250B 2.5 QPC297 7.
i Operating power requirements 37 Module power consumption The typical and worst case power consumption data for each fully configured module are shown in Table 14. The “typical power” data is generally adequate for use in .system power engineering calculations, since it is representative of most systems with Modules fully loaded (configured) with cards, and under moderate traffic conditions.
38 Operating power requirements System power calculation guidelines The SL- 1 system was designed so that there would be no restrictions as a result of power or thermal limitations. In other words, any card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any (logically) valid combination of cards, with no engineering rules. _ .-i’ Two system power calculation methods are shown below.
Operating power requirements 39 For calculations normally done in apparent or complex power (such as AC wire and panel size, UPS rating for AC reserve power, etc.), simply divide the total real power (in Watts) by the typical system power factor of 0.6 to obtain the complex power (in VA). Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 .. ..
40 Operating power requirements Worksheet A System power consumption - “Wired for” Typical M o d u l e xOtv P o w e r = NT6D39 x400= x420= NT6D44 x400= x450= NT8Dll x500= x690= NT8D13 x400= x 575 = NT8D34 x300= NT8D35 x300= x325= NT8D37 x550= x720= NT8D47 x300= x350= x50= x80= P e d e s t a l s Typical Power (Watts) = . . x 335 = . .- . Max. Power (Watts) = AC System Current Drain (Amps ac) Nominal: Typical Power / 230= Max. Power I230 = .
Operating power requirements 41 Worksheet B NT8D13 Power calculation Circuit Pack Qtv x Power = QPC71F x 2.5 = QPC192B x 12.0 = QPC250B x 2.5 = QPC297 -x 7.1 = QPC422A x 10.9 = QPC430E x 14.8 = QPC432C x 10.2 = QPC449D x 15.6 = QPC450E x 7.0 = QPC578D x 24.6 = QPC594D x 32.8 = QPC659C x 40.4 = QPC723 A x 14.8 = QPC789A x 26.
42 Operating power requirements Worksheet C NT8D37 Power calculation I Circuit Pack otv x Power = NT8DOlAC x32= NT8DOlAD x32= NT8DO2AA x28= NTaDo3AA x20= IYT’8DO9AA x20= NT8D 14ti x36= NT8DlSAA x34= NT8D16AA x7= Total NT8D37 Power (Watts)= Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 C. .
Operating power requirements 43 Worksheet D System Power Consumption - “As equipped” . . :, .-...\.. . .._._ . . ;‘: ,“.z;;‘23 Typical x P o w e r = Otv .. _.. ,. ,_ I f ._I .: Mod& Maximum x Power = otv NT6D39 x400= x420= NT6D44 x400= x450= NTSDll x500= x690= NTSD13 (from Worksheet B) = (from Worksheet B) = NTSD34 x300= x335= NTSD35 x300= x 325 = NT8D37 x300= x350= x50= x80= Typical Power (Watts) = Max. Power (Watts) = P e d e s t a l s _’ .
44 Operating power requirements Upgrades to existing itistallations Total power consumption of an installed system can be determined in several different ways. Two methods are listed below, in order of decreasing accuracy. - Measure current drain for the complete installation over at .least a twoweek period under actual operating conditions. Determine peak current drain from these measurements. - Measure idle (or near idle) current dram for the complete installation.
Operating power requirements 45 Table 15 SL-1 system heat dissipation Heat dissipation Module .. .. Watts BTUlhr NT8Dll Common/Peripheral Equipment 450 1530 NT6D39 CPU/Network 400 1360 NT8D34 CPU 300 1020 NT8D35 Network 300 1020 NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment 300 1020 NT8D37 Peripheral Equipment 425 1450 NT8D47 Remote Peripheral Equipment 300 1020 NT6D44 Meridian Mail 400 1369 NT8D36 Junctor 0 0 Afote:Thermal load (BTU/hr) = Total power dissipation (Watts) x 3.
46 Operating power requirements .- Power engineering 553-3001-152 .u : r ..
47 Reserve power Reserve power is available for both AC and DC systems. AC reserve power is provided by a separate Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), installed in series with the main system AC power feed. A UPS generally consists of a combination battery charger (AC-DC converter) and inverter (DC-AC converter), along with its associated batteries. The batteries may be internal or external to the UPS unit itself. I.
48 Reserve power UPS sizing Since power distribution for AC systems is provided on a per-column basis, partial system backup is available for all system options, thus reducing reserve power requirements. In other words, it is possible to back up all of the common equipment, but only a portion of the peripheral equipment, reducing both UPS and battery costs.
Reserve power 49 Table 17 Verified UPS systems Vendor KVA Rating Battery Voltage Alpha Technologies 1 48 Alpha Technologies 1.5 48 Alpha Technologies 3 48 Best Power Technobgy 3 48 Best Power Technology 5 48 Exide Electronics 1.
50 Resetve power The UPS systems are available directly from the recommended vendors. For application assistance and direct sales information, the UPS vendor contacts in the U.S. are listed below: Alpha Technologies, Inc. 3767 Alpha Way Bellingham, WA 98225 (206) 647-2360 Fax: (206) 671-4936 Best Power Technology, Inc. P.O.
Reserve power 51 Alarm Monitoring ^ A UPS to System Monitor Alarm cable is available from Northern Telecom for each of the recommended UPS vendors. The alarm interface consists of an “inverter on” signal to indicate that the commercial power is down and the UPS is supplying power to the system, and a “summary a@m” signal from the UPS to indicate a fault or alarm condition.
52 Reserve power Figure 14 AC reserve power configuration Commercial AC power in Optional external Battery bank I I ” f-z!. ;:c .Y 2: .‘ ;. -‘_.. . ^,. _~ :-. :...
Reserve power 53 DC reserve power - Reserve power for DC systems can be provided simply by adding batteries to the external distribution. The reserve battery capacity is determined by multiplying the system current drain by the time that is needed for the reserve power to operate. This will determine the total Ampere-Hour requirements of the batteries. Refer to Worksheets A through D. The following guidelines should be used in determining DC reserve power requirements.
54 Reserve power The float and equalization voltages defined in Table 19 are not an exact requirement as long as voltages do not exceed -56.5 V. See Table 7 in “DC power description.” Not all sealed cells require equalization, but the equalization voltage can be used for fast charging. Batteries to be used with the SL-1 should be sized by using an end voltage of 4IV.
55 Engineering and configuration guidelines Configuring the Meridian 1 power system requires attention to the following points: - Both AC and DC-powering are available. - The AC power supply or DC-DC Converter that is used in a particular module is virtually identical as far as external configuration purposes are I. concerned. - Equipment Module power and cooling criteria are also the same for both AC and DC.
56 Engineering and configuration guidelines AC power architecture ^ The internal AC power system consists of the following main elements: - Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU) _ - AC Power Supplies No arbitrary selection of these components is required - they are included automatically in the System functional determination process.
Engineering and configuration guidelines 57 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC (NT8DO6AA) The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide power to all peripheral equipment modules in J% systems. It converts 208/240 V ac to +5 V, +8.5 V, f10 V, +15 V, and -48 V dc voltages used to power peripheral equipment logic cards and to supply “talk battery” to lines and trunks. This power supply is located in the far left hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup.
58 Engineering and configuration guidelines Pedestal (NT8D27AB) The Pedestal supports the column of Equipment Modules, and houses the Power Distribution Unit, the Blower Unit, and a reusable dust filter. The Field Wiring Terminal Block is mounted in the bottom of the Pedestal.
Engineering and configuration guidelines 59 Configuration : .:.
60 Engineering and configuration guidelines internal DC power equipment components. The following components are required to configure and DC powered system. .,- -4 c$;;j Common Equipment Power Supply DC (NT6D41 AA) The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common equipment Modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup,” and converts -48 V dc to +5 V and +12 V dc, to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards.
Engineering and configuration guidelines 61 - Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8DllDC ) - Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D47DC) RingingGeneratorDC(NT7D03AA) The AC Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal .48 V dc input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 V dc. The frequency and voltage options are 20/25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 V ac. It also supplies -150 V dc message waiting lamp 50012500 set applications.
62 Engineering and configuration guidelines Switched Mode Rectifier -46VBOA (NTGD5qAA) Converts 208/240 V ac (nominal) to -48 V dc (nominal), with a 30A output. Connects to the system through the QBLlS Battery Distribution Box. Based on QRF12. , Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). Generally one rectifier per every two fully loaded modules. Exact quantity depends on system configuration and power requirements.
Engineering and configuration guidelines 63 Rectifier Bafflehloirnting Kit (Nl7D1201) The Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support brackets for mounting the NT6D52AA Rectifier to to NT7D12AA Rack, together with a heat baffle plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower rectifier away from the inlet to the upper rectifier, thereby allowing cooling by natural convection. Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). One per NT6D52AA Rectifier.
64 Engineering and configuration guidelines Configuration guidelines Used with system option 71 (DC version). Quautity as required by system power consumptioti. Switched Mode Rectifier - 48VEOA (NT5CO3BJ) This is a solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts 208/240 V ac (nominal) to 48 V dc (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13 power plant, with up to ten rectifiers in parallel. Configuration guidelines Used with system option 71 (DC version).
Engineering and configuration guidelines 65 - No lighting, air conditioning, heating, generators or motors shall be serviced from this equipment room panel. - In areas where isolated ground systems are permissible, this panel will provide sufficient ground connection points on the isolated ground plate or bar to handle the AC circuit grounds as well as the other ground reference conductors associated with the Meridian 1.
66 Engineering and configuration guidelines The following must also be-observed to implement the single-point ground: - All ground conductors must conform to local codes and terminate in a manner that is permanent, resulting in low impedance connections. - All terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance. - All grounding conductors must be continuous with no splices or junctions and tagged “WARNING - Ground Connection - Do not remove or disconnect.
67 Power conductors Wire size calculation guidelines Determining wire gauges to connect a pedestal to a rectifier or other external distribution hardware is a very simple procedure, but it can be tedious if a lot of external components are involved. A programmable calculator or computer can help if it is going to be done often.
68 Power conductors The formula The following formula may be used to calculate the minimum wire size in Circular Mils (CM) required to connect any two points knowing current, distance and the desired drop for a specific cable: CM= 11.1x Ix D/V where: CM = wire size required in Circular Mils I = current in amps (use the maximum expected) D = distance in feet V = Allowable voltage drop.
Power conductors 69 Table 21 Maximum allowable voltage drops From To V drop - BAT Pedestal Dist. DisChg 1.0 + BR Pedestal Dist. Corn 1.0 -BAT Dist. (- ) Battery term 0.25 +BR Dist. (+) Battery term 0.25 -BAT Rectifier Disk Chg 0.5 + BR Rectifier Dist. Corn 0.5 Conductor IMote 7: Dist. is an abbreviation for Battery Distribution Box (i.e. QBL15, CtBLl2). CAUTION Although 0.25/0.5/1.
70 Power conductors 2 . A Bat or BR conductor from the QBLl5 to the Battery is 25 feet long and must carry a maximum of 70 Amps: Using CM= 11.1x Ix D/V CM = 11.1.x 70 x 25/0.5 = 38850 Choosing a standard gauge equal to or larger than this will mean 4 AWG which has a cross section of 41740 CM. 3. Example of the “Caution Note” for short distances - a Bat or BR conductor from the QBLl5 to the Rectifier is only 4 feet long and must carry a maximum of 25 Amps: Using CM= 11.1x Ix D/V CM= 11.1x25x4/0.
Power conductors 71 column draws more or less than 60 Amps. Consult a wire handbook for precise calculations. There are four options available for bringing wire into the pedestal: Single conduit One 3/4 inch conduit access. Dual conduit Two 3/4 inch conduit accesses. Junction box (single 4 AWG) A junction box can be used to interface to one of the 3/4 inch conduit access points in the pedestal. Single runs of #4 AWG per feed are used between the junction box and the distribution point.
72 Power conductors Table 22 Pedestal wire guage requirements with two 30 A feeds (five’wiresj Wire AWG Single conduit Dual conduit 8 6 4 4 O-loft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-20ft Yes Yes Yes Yes o-3oft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-4Oit Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-50ft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-60ft No Yes Y 0 - 70 ft.
73.
74 List of terms I HZ Hertz (cycles per second) - IG Isolated Ground inverter DC to AC converter LR Logic Return LRE Logic Return Equalizer MPDU Module (UEM) Power Distribution Unit mS millisecond NEC National Electrical Code (USA) P B X Private Branch Exchange Pcord Power Cord (abbreviation) PDU Power Distribution Unit (in pedestal) PE Peripheral Equipment (line card equipment) PEC Product Engineering Code PFTU Power Fail Transfer Unit Pwr Power (abbreviation) QBLlP 75 Amp
List of terms 75 UEM Universal EQuipment Module Underwriters Laboratories UL ._\ -I. ::-, :z.;L.ZeI I- , T. ;., ups .i .-. ._:< Uninterruptible Power System VAC,Vac Volts AC VDC.Vdc Volts DC W Volts peak Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 . ..’ ‘. .
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Power engineering Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. information subject to change without notice. Release 1.0 Standard January, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. ::.:.“,, : ..
:/ ;.i !?-i ._, ic.: -: ,~ : .::. .,- :_:: <:::-7.‘ ,. . . . ^ :, :-:. .,. :::.
SL-1 System options 21,5-l, 61,71 Spares planning Publication number: 553-3001-153 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O .. - 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights resewed. Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 ..
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Spares planning ..
iii About this document General information The Spares planning guide provides all the information necessary for the calculation and planning of spares (replaceable) items and provides failure rates for the SL-1 hardware. The success of a maintenance program depends largely on the availability of an adequate stock of replaceable items. To ease maintenance and system reliability, follow the procedures given here for calculating spares stocks.
iv About this document - System engineering (553-3001-151) - Power engineering (553-3001-152) - Sparesplanning (553-3001-153) - Equipment identflcation and ordering (553-3001-154) See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index (553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
V Contents Spares planning Definitions and assumptions Calculating spares requirements Tables: NFT values 1 1 5 7 Failure rates Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 s. :..
vi Contents ._ ,“..i: . . . .-. ‘:. 1.
1 Spares planning Definitions and assumptions Failure rate-Failure rate equals the estimated number of failures for that item during one million (106) hours of operation. The only exception is to measurements for cabling or other items with low failure rates. Rates are also measured in Failures in Time (FIT) measurements. One FIT equals one .. billion (109) hours of operation. Sparing interval-The sparing interval is the period of time that stocks of replaceable items should last without being replenished.
2 Definitions and assumptions Turnaround time for rep&r-The turnaround time for the return to stock of a failed item is about 10 working days (240 hours) from a repair house. (See Figure 1.
Definitions and assumptions 3 The turnaround timk for the return &I stock of a failed item is about two days from a centralized depot, (See Figure 2.) .: ., 1.: :1: .. L ,. . . ...%-. ,“TS .:I :.:: Figure 2 Centralized depot service Y-Day Tirnry ;rnaro,und 1 O-Day Turnaround Time (240 hrs.
4 Definitions and assumptions Actual turnaround periods Will vary in the field. As the number of systems served increases, the percentage of replaceable items required for stock is reduced. (See Figure 3.) Figure 3 Effect of turnaround on spares stock “” 50 - I I I - lo-Day turnaround -----2-Day turnaround E $ 4 0 - NO . In Field (Thousands) Population range-Population range is the quantity of each type of SL-1 switch in the area served by the depot.
Definitions and assumptions 5 Calculating spares requirements Replaceable items and their associated failure rates are listed in this document. Quantities of spares required to stock a depot for the one-year sparing interval can be calculated by following the procedures. Table 1 translates the NPT values to the number of spares required for that item. The following values are used: N-The number of a spares item in use. F-The failure rate for a particular spares item.
6 Definitions and assumptions Procedure 1 Determining spares quantities to stock interval a depot for the one-year sparing 1 Determine the number (N) of in-service specified circuit packs serviced by the depot. 2 Determine the pack failure rate (F) for the specified circuit pack in the Spares planning guide. (See Note 1 below.) 3 Determine turnaround time 4 Calculate the NFT value by multiplying N x F x T. 5 Determine the number of spares required by using the NFT values in Table 4.
7 Tables: NFT values Table 1 Stock qu, antity of spares 3.46 4.01 4.58 5.16 5.76 6.37 2.94 3.46 4.01 4.58 5.16 5.76 11 12.9 12 13.6 13 14.3 14 15.0 15 15.8 16 16.5 -continued- 1 1 13.60 14.30 15.00 15.80 16.50 17.20 i 27 28 29 30 31 32 Spares planning 553-3001-153 .
8 T a b l e s : NFTvalues Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153 -.
Tables: NFTvalues 9 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares -continued- Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
10 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
Tables: NFTvalues 11 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares NFT values Number of spares NFT values Number of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153
12 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153 .d :. : ..
Tables: NFTvalues 13 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares -amtinued- Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 k.
14 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares _.._,.. . . s -.. :-. .” .j .
15 Failure rates This section lists replaceable items used in SL-1s and provides their associated failure rates. Some failure rates are not available (N/A) at this time but will be offered in a supplement to this document. The replaceable items are grouped according to equipment types as follows: - universal equipment modules - cooling equipment - circuit packs - station equipment - power equipment - mass storage equipment Note: The failure rates are based on a circuit pack ambient temperature of 40’ C.
16 Failure rates Table 2 Failure rates of modules 1 Table 3 Failure rates of cooling equipment Spares planning 553-3001-153
Failure rates 1 i’ -- Table 4 Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Code NT8DOlAD NTSDOlAC NT8DO2AA NT8DO3AB NT8DO4AA NT8DO9AB NT8D14AA NT8DlSAA NT8D16AA NT8D17AA NT8D18AA Description Failure Rate per 106 hrs Controller-2 6.5 Controller-4 7.0 Digital Line Card 1.8 5.1 Analog Line Card Superloop Network Card 5.1 I Message Waiting Line Card 1 5.8 Universal Trunk Card 3.4 E&M Trunk Card 3.7 Digitone Receiver Card 2.7 Conference/Tone and Digit 5.1 Switch OS) Card Network/DigitoneReceiver 7.3 .
18 Failure rates Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs Law) QPC254 --continued- , Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 .. Tone and Digit Switch (ALaw) ’ 14.
Failure rates 19 Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs PECINT Description 1 1 Failure Rate per 106 hrs .0.
20 Failure rates Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Code QlT295 Description QPC301 CO, FX, MR DET Trunk Circuit (A-Law) 4-Wire E&M Trunk (A-Law) Attendant Console Monitor @Law) CDR ROM QPC327 QPC330 LineCard MFC Sender/Receiver Buffered Message Register Ql’C296 QPC297 Failure Rate per lo6 hrs _ 10.46 8.38 7.85 10.05 20.07 9.78 /“‘“’ Spares planning 553-3001-153 ..
Failure rates 21 Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs -continued- Spares planning 553-3001-153 -. : :.
22 Failure rates Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs QPC464 QPC47 1 QPC472 QPC473 QPC475 QPC477 Peripheral Buffer Clock Controller Digital Trunk Interface 1 DTI Carrier Interface 1 Digitone Receiver [ Bus Terminating Unit I -continued- Spares planning 553-3001-153 c : : ! 9.00 2.44 6.00 6.
Failure rates 23 Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs 1 PEC/NT Code QPC494 QPC496 QPC500 1 1 QFC527 QPC528 QPC532 QPC536 OF040 1 CO/FX/WATS trunk (A-law) 1 CO/IX/WATS trunk - (EIA) Grd Button Line Card Digital Trunk Interface Tone Detector I Description 500/2500 Message Waiting Extender PE Backplane -continued- 1Failure Rate1 per lo6 hrs 8.00 0.69 3.24 12.37 1 14.23 13.93 12.36 .6.49 1 -. ..:,:.: ,’ ,:, .-, , Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 c.
24 Failure rates Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs Centralized Attendant Spares planning 553-3001-153
Failure rates 25 Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Code Ql’C673 QPC674 QPC706 QPC710 QPC720 QPC723 1 QPC757 QPC775 Ql’C789 QPC814 QPC841 QPC918 QPC939 QPC940 .j ..
26 Failure rates Table 5 Failure rates of station equipment Description PEC/NT Code Ml250 Console M2250 TCM Console M2006 Digital Telephone M2008 Digital Telephone M2016S Digital Telephone M2216 Digital Telephone M2616 Digital Telephone M3000 Touchphone 500/2500 Telephone Set Line Cord NE-500/2500 NE-DGQC35 NE-G3AR-35 Handset NE-G3DRN- Console Handset 3 NE-T1 Transmitter NE-u1 Receiver NTIFOSAA M200!9 Digital Tel Set NTlFO6AA M2012 Digital without hands Spares planning 553-3001-153 .. .
Failure rates 27 Table 5 continued Failure rates of station equipment PEC/NT Code Q=l Q ,:: QM-I-2 QMT3 QMT4 QMTll Description Handsfiee Interface/Remote Powering Kit Automatic Handsfree Interface Kit Headset Kit lo-Button Key Lamp Expansion Module 20-Button Key Lamp Expansion Module Lamp Field Array Module Handset Module Asynchronous/Synchronous Failure Rate per lo6 hrs 0.33 0.82 0.25 2.89 4.73 13.99 0.50 6.34 .- QMT12 QMTl5 QMT21 ..
28 Failure rates Table 6 Failure rates of power equipment PEC/NTCode NTSC03BJ 1 Description 1 Failure Rate 1 per 106 hrs . N/A Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/50A NT6D40AA DC Peripheral Equipment Power Supply NT6D4 1AA DC Common Equipment I Power Supply I NT6D52AA 1 Switched Mode Rectifier 43Vf30A NTi’DO3AA DC Ringing Generator DC Common/Peripheral NT7DO4AA Equipment Power Supply NT7DlOAA DC Power Distribution Unit NT7D12AA NT7D14AA 1.6 0.6 1.2 1.81 3.
Failure rates 29 Table 6 continued Failure rates of power equipment 1 PEC/NT Code NT8D62AA NT8D62DC QBL12 1 QBLl5 QCA13 1 QCA321 QPC188 QRF12 1 QRF12 1 Description Temperature Sensor Panel Battery Distribution Box I Power/Battery Distribution Box DC Power Plant I Junction Box 1 Battery Monitor I 48V Rectifier I-52V Rectifier 1 Failure Rate per lo6 hrs N/A I ! I I 1.10 2.81 N/A N/A 1.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Spares planning Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights resewed. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,?1 Equipment identification and ordering information Standard ,.., 1::::: :: : -,: ::: .: ‘; C.
-- ..
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Equipment identification and ordering information Publication number: 553-3001-154 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O . . . .._” ,. ::-, : :-; ,. _.;.:.,.) ‘.
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 ..
... III About this document This document identifies equipment of the Meridian 1 System options 21, 5 1,61,71 that can be ordered individually. The items are described in terms of purpose, quantity required, and system hardware (system option), as appropriate.
iv About this document - General maintenance information (553-3001~500) - Fault clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overviewbf software kchitecture, procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed description of all Xl 1 features and services.
V Contents -, :.: ._-L’. . .:-..:. .,. . _ ;. General 1 Equipment packages Conversion and expansion packages Equipment availability Special features Product coding 1 1 2 2 2 .
vi Contents NT6D52AA Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/30A NT6D53AA Junction Box NT6D5303 Logic Return Equalizer NT7D0003 Fan and Sensor Panel NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC NT7D04AA CUPE Power Supply DC NT7DiOAA Power Distribution Unit DC NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack NT7D14AA CE/PE Power Supply AC NT7D15AA System Monitor - System option 21 A NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC NT7D1201 Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit NT8DOGAA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC NT8D21 AA Ringing Generator AC NT8D22AB System Mo
Contents vii ,:.‘:; f:j ./:, .--. _ . . . ..^ i/“.._ ‘y’.,.$,:, z.;-_ .: >‘,S y::,, .
viii Contents QPC237 QPC250 QPC297 QPC422 QPC430 QPC432 QPC449 QPC450 QPC578 QPC594 QPC659 QPC723 QPC789 QPC918 4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk Release Link Trunk Attendant Console Monitor Tone Detector Asynchronous Interface Line 4-Port Data Line Loop Signaling Trunk CO/FWWATS Trunk Integrated Services Digital Line 16-Port 500/2500 Line Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer RS-232 4-Port interface Line 16-Port 500/2500 Line (Message Waiting) High-Speed Data Card Station equipment Meridian Modular Telephones M2000 s
Contents ix Station equipment replaceable items 67 Cabling 71 NT7Dll AE module-to-module power harness NT8D40AA AC power cord NT8D40AM module-to-module power-harness NT8D40AY AC power cord NT8D40BJ System Monitor to backplane cable NT8D40BK System Monitor trip cable NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable NT8D46AC Thermostat harness NT8D46AD System Monitor SDI cable NT8D46AG System Monitor to SDI paddle board cable NT8D46AH System Monitor to MDF cable NT8D46AJ System Monitor to UPS (Best) cable NT8D46AL S
x Contents NT8D88 Network to I/O cable NT8D90AF SDI multiple-port cable - internal NT8D91 Network to Controller cable NT8D92AB Controller to l/O cable NT8D93 SDI paddle board (Dual Port) I/O to DTUDCE cable NT8D95 SDI I/O to DTUDCE cable .
1 General The selection of a system option that best meets individual requirements is determined by the following factors: - Number and type of terminal devices required - Number and type of trunks required - Traffic requirements for lines, trunks and consoles - Special features required - Growth forecast in terms of ports and features Refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) and Power engineering (553-3001-152) to determine the proper system requirement. .
2 General Equipment availability - The equipment listed in this Northern Telecom Publication is available through Northern Telecom. Equipment may not be available in all market areas and may be discontinued at any time. Contact a Northern Telecom sales office for equipment availability. Special features Special features are purchased as options to the basic system. These features may consist of software or hardware only, or both. Those special features that include hardware (e.g.
General 3 Figure l-l Modular and apparatus coding cohparisbn MW CODE (MDS) NT OR00 AA 01 I I fixed prefix QLD CODE IAPPARATUS\ QPC 123 A A 1 1 I SL-1 circuit pack release number series 553-3046 Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 .. . :.
4 General Equipment identification and ordering information ..
5 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) are self-contained equipment modules which house system components such as card cages, circuit cards, power units, mass storage units, and cabling. Each UEM is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide, 52.1 cm (20.5 in.) deep (55.9 cm (22.0 in.) with covers), and 43.2 cm (17 in.) high. The weight of a UEM is approximately 21.
6 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging This module is available in two versions: - NT6D39AA for AC systems - NT6D39DC for DC systems The NT6D39 CPU/NET card cage contains 18 card slots which support the following: - network cards - Clock Controller - Serial Data Interface (SDI)/Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) - Peripheral Signaling - 3-Port Extender (3PE) - mass storage unit - CPU Function - CPU Interface - Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA) - Memory - D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) - P
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 7 - NT6D44AA for AC systems - NT6D44DC for DC systems The Meridian Mail Module is powered by two Common Equipment Power Supplies. Refer to the Meridian Mail suite of documents (553-7041-xxx) for detailed information. Quantity-Maximum of five per system NT8Dll AC, NT8Dll DC CE/PE Module System hardwareSystem option 21 and 21A Purpos+The NT8Dll Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred to as NT8Dll CE/PE) supports CPU, network, and Intelligent I.
8 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging The NT8Dll CE/PE Module is powered by a Common/Peripheral Equipment (CE/PE) Power Supply. Quantity-One per system NT8D13AA, NT8D13DC Peripheral Equipment Module System hardwareSystem option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-The NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred to as NT8D13 PE) supports the Dual Loop Buffer (DLB), and 10 card slotsThe PE Buffer is situated near the center of the module, with five cards to the left and five cards to the right.
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 9 - CPU Interface - MS1 - Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) - DCHI - PRI/DTI - Clock Controller - Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) The NT8D34 CPU Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power SUPPlY * I.
10 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging - PFu/DTl The NT8D35 NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power S”PPlY. Quantity-A maximum of 10 per system (five network groups) NT8D36AA Inter Group Module System hardware--System option 71 Purpose-The NT8D36AA Inter Group Module provides a path for the switching of traffic between the network groups in the system. Faceplate cables from the Clock Controller (CC) and Intergroup Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to the Inter Group Module.
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 11 - Digital Line card (DLC) - Analog Message Waiting Line card (MLC) The NT8D37 IPE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, and a Ringing Generator when 500/2500 sets are supported by the module. Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) .
12 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging - PRI/DTI (optional) The NT8D47 WE Module is powered by a Common Equipment/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. I Quantity-Since each NT8D47 WE Module serves two network loops, the number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the remote site. NT8D49 Spacer Kit System Hardware-All Purpose-Bolts modules together for side-by-side expansion.
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 13 - NT6D3903 NT6D39AA/DC - NT8D1103 NT8Dl lAC/DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Module - NT8D1303 - NT8D3403 NT8D13AA/DC Peripheral Equipment Module - NT8D3503 NT8D35AA/DC Network Module - NT8D3703 NT8D37AA/DC Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module - NT8D47AA/DC Module NT8D4703 CPU/Network Module NT8D34AA/DC CPU Module Remote Peripheral Equipment Top Cap System Hardware-All I. Purpose-The top cap is mounted on the highest module of each column.
14 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging :,i, - NT8D27AC for System option’21A only - NT7DO9AA for DC systems The pedestal for AC and DC systems (except System option 21A) can house any of the following field replaceable assemblies: - Power Distribution Unit NT8D53AB or NT7DlOAA - Blower Unit NT8D52A.
15 Power and cooling equipment A0367754 Top Cap Fan System Hardware-System option 21A Purpose-The A0367754 Top Cap Fan is located in the Fan and Sensor Panel. It provides cooling for the NT7D14AA CE/PE power Supply AC. There is no speed or temperature control provided with it. Power. to the Top Cap Fan is controlled by the circuit breaker located on the back panel of the pedestal.
16 Power and cooling equipment Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the following DC modules: - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NTSD37DC) - Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8Dl3DC) NT6D41AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC System Hardware-All Purpos-The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common equipment modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”.
Power and cooling equipment 17 NT6D53AA Junction Box System Hardware-All (DC version) Purpose-The Junction Box is required when the distance from the rectifier to the pedestal is over 0.74 m (8 ft), which requires wire larger than 10 AWG. It provides a set of connection terminals for the 4-AWG wire that comes from the rectifier, and a set of connection terminals for the lo-AWG wire that goes into the pedestal. Refer to Power engineering (553-3001-152) for more information.
18 Power and cooling equipment NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC System Hardware-All Purpose-The Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal -48V DC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are-20/25/50 Hi and 70/80/86 VAC. It also supplies -150V DC Message Waiting lamp 500/2500 set applications. The Ringing Generator DC mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC.
Power and cooling equipment 19 Quantity-One p&pedestal/column in DC systems NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack System Hardware-21/51/61 (DC versions) Purpose-This is a 48.3-cm (19-in.) open relay rack which is approximately 1.5 m (5 ft) high. It supports up to three NT6D52AA Rectifiers in a single column. Quantity-One rack per every three NT6D52.
20 Power and cooling equipment NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC - System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers Purpose-The NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC is housed within the pedestal and provides cooling for the entire column. It consists of three fans and a circuit breaker located in the front. Quantity-One per pedestal NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers Purpose-The NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC is the same as the NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC except that it is used for DC systems.
Power and cooling equipment 21 Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the following AC modules: - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37AA) - Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA) NT8D21AA Ringing Generator AC - System Hardware-All Purpose-The Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal 208/240 VAC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are 20/25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 VAC.
22 Power and cooling equipment NT8D29AA Common Equipment Power Supply AC System Hardware--System option 51/61/71 Purpose-The Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the common equipment modules in AC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts 208/24OV AC to +5V and f12 V DC to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards.
Power and cooling equipment 23 NT8D52AA Blower Unit System Hardware-All ‘. . :;i Purpose-The Blower Unit is part of the system cooling assembly and provides forced-convection cooling. Housed within the pedestal, it contains two backward-curved impellers (rotor blades) which are cylindrically shaped, approximately 22.8 cm (9.in) in diameter, and 6.9 cm (2.75 in) thick. A circuit breaker is located on the front of the blower chassis to turn the unit on and off. Each unit weighs about 1.5 kg (3.5 lbs). 2.
24 Power and cooling equipment NT8D53AD Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A System Hardware-System option 21A Purpose--The Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A is a panel located in the pedestal. It contains a circuit breaker, a terminal block, and an EM1 filter. The power cable enters the pedestal and connects to the circuit breaker.
Power and cooling equipment 25 breaker and is use&in conjunction with the NT8DO6AA PE Power Supply AC and the NTSD21AA Ringing Generator AC. Quantity-One per NTSD13AA PE or NT8D37AA IPE Module NT8D62AA, NT8D62DC Temperature Sensor Panel System Hardware-AN except System option 21A Purpose-The NT8D62 Temperature Sensor Panel communicates with the System Monitor in the event of overheating. It contains hvo temperature sensors which protect against the.rmal damage by detecting extreme temperature.
26 Power and cooling equipment QBLI 5 Power/Battery Distribution Box. System Hardware-System option 21/51/61 (DC versions) Purpose-Allows the parallel connection of up to three NT6D52AA Rectifiers, for connection to the system and to reserve batteries. Includes main fuses, diode blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and sense lead fusing on connections from each rectifier.
Power and cooling equipment 27 QRF12 -52 V Rectifier System Hardware--System option 21/51/61 (DC version) Purpuse-Converts 115 V AC and 220 V AC to -52 V DC (nominal). QFW12B voltage conversions from 9OV to 129V, and l?OV to 25OV. Connects to the columns through the QBLi5 Power/Battery Distribution Box.
28 Power and cooling equipment Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
29 Common Equipment cards NT8D04AA Super-loop Network System Hardware-All Purpose- Provides 120 time slots (one superloop) interface between Network and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Utilizes the equivalence of four network loops. May be connected to one or two NT8DOl Controller card(s). The Superloop Network card is equipped with a Motorola 68000~type microprocessor which performs network diagnostics and signaling control, and communicates with the Intelligent Peripheral Controller.
30 Common Equipment cards Quantity-As required. R&fer to System engineering (553-3001-151) for engineering details. NT8Dl8AA NetworWDigitone Receiver System Hardware-System option 21 and 21A Purpose-Combines the functionality of the Network Controller and Digitone Receiver cards in a mother/daughterboard assembly. The motherboard plugs into a dedicated slot on the backplane. The daughterboard attaches to the motherboard through an SDI/ESDI connector and does not connect to the backplane.
Common Equipment cards 31 - data rates of 300,600,1200,2400,4800, and 9600 baud - Data Terminal Equipment (DTB) mode - Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode Quantity-Three maximum per NT8Dl lCE/pE Module; two maximum per NT6D39 CPU/NET Module NT8D68AA Floppy Disk Unit System hardwareSystem option 21/51/61/71 Purpose--The Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) is used to load the programs and office data into the system memory. The FDU contains two 3.
32 Common Equipment cards . j .i Quantity-One per systeui QMM42 Security Data Cartridge System Hardware-All Purpose-This is a security measure that allows a customer access only to software packages purchased for his system. This security data cartridge is mounted on either the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface or QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface card.
Common Equipment cards 33 Quantity-Two pef Network Module (use vintage C when two or more groups are installed) QPC414 Network System Hardware-All Purpuse-Provides 30 time slots interface per each of two network loops. Provides speech path switching, signaling and control circuits for two network loops.
34 Common Equipment cards Quantity-Two for System option 71, and one per CPU when DTI or PU is required in other options. QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 Purpose-Bus Terminating Units (BTUs) are installed in the CE Modules. They provide a logical termination to the CPU and network buses. They are paddle boards installed in dedicated slots, between circuit cards from the front of the module.
Common Equipment cards 35 QPC579 CPU Function System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 Purpose--The CPU Function card works in conjunction with the CPU Interface card (QPCSSO). It contains the main CPU logic circuitry. The CPU provides a 24-bit data bus. The CPU Function card contains a QPC939 system ROM.
36 Common Equipment cards QPC584 Mass Storage Interface System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 Purpose-Interface between the Multi Disk Unit (MDU) and CPU(s). Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. i The MS1 is used with the MDU and contains: -two high capacity floppy disk drives or -one Winchester disk drive with two high capacity floppy drives as backup Note: QPCSS4D or later vintage is required. Quantity-One MS1 circuit card for each CPUFIDU.
Common Equipment cards 37 QPC742 Floppy Disk Inte-rface System Hardware-All Purpose--interface between the Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) and one CPU. Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. Quantity-One per CPU QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface System Hardware-All Purpose-The D-Channel Handler Interface @CHI) card processes the LAPD protocol for ISDN primary rate signaling channel and ISDN Signaling Link (ISL).
38 Common Equipment cards QPC939 Read-Only Memory System Hardware-System option 5 l/61/71 Purpose-Read-Only Memory @OM) daughterboard on the QPC579 CPU Function card. Quantity-One per CPU QPC940 Read-Only Memory System Hardware-System option 21 Purpose-ROM daughterboard on the QPC687 CPU with SDI/RTC card. Quantity-One per CPU Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 .. .
39 Peripheral Equipment cards NT8DOl AD Controller-2 System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to two 10.24Mbs superloops. Each Controller-2 card serves up to 16 IPE cards. . . The Controller-2 card interfaces with up to two NT8DO4AA Superloop Network cards.
40 Peripheral Equipment cards NT8D02AA Digital Line card System Hardware-All Purpose--Provides interface to up to 16 digital integrated voice and data sets for a total of 32 ports.
Peripheral Equipment cards 41 microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as follows: - control of card operation - card identification - self-test - status reporting to the Controller - maintenance diagnostics Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IRE Module NT8D14AA Universal Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides interface connecting the trunk facility to the NT8D37 IRE Module.
42 Peripheral Equipment cards - Paging trunk The Universal Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 - Ml985 and EL4 Standard 464A. Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15AA E&M Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Used in both A-Law and V-Law applications. Provides interface connecting the trunk facility to the NT8D37 lPE Module.
Peripheral Equipment cards 43 NT8DlGAA Digitone R e c e i v e r System Hardware-All Purpose--Provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) detection. These channels are assigned on the DS30X loop. There is one 8 Kbps signaling channel provided for maintenance messaging and tone reporting. The NT8D16AA Digitone Receiver allows access to the filters for parameter alterations in order to service different environments (e.g. international applications).
44 Peripheral Equipment cards - Relays line status information to the processor - Decodes line control information from the processor Note: QPC63F or later vintage is required. Quantity-One for each network loop connected to the RPE Module at the local equipment location QPC65 Rernote Peripheral Switch System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-Used for RPE applications.
Peripheral Equipment cards 45 QPC67 Carrier Maintenance System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains an M-type (3017 Hz) faultlocate filter. Provides DC detection circuitry for the fault-locate pair, and carrier loopback relays to facilitate software maintenance testing. Terminates and gives access to the order wire pair via a jack and binding posts on the faceplate. Note: QPC67E or later vintage is required.
46 Peripheral Equipment cards QPC99 Carrier Interface System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains two carrier line receivers with 7.5 dB pads built-in. Converts bipolar line signals into TIL level signals. Provides facilities for carrier looping. Monitors system and invokes emergency transfer if carrier fails. Note: QPC99F or later vintage is required.
Peripheral Equipment cards 47 QPC250 Release Link Trirnk System Hardware-All :.i s ‘. 1 7.: ..-.;:. ., I_ .,..... ._/. .. L.:.::::;:..:; ‘;.z’..: 7.:’ ‘-1 Purpose-Used to interface a remote system, arranged for the Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) option, with the main system where CAS attendant is located. Refer to Centralized Attendant S&vice (CAS) Feature description and engineering (553-2681-100) and Release Link Trunk- Description, operation, and installation (553-2681-180) for more information.
48 Peripheral Equipment cards QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides four asynchronous line ports. Used in the SL- 1 Data Feature to interface to data equipment conforming to the EIA RS-422 standard. Refer to SL-1 Data Feature-General-description and provisioning (553-2731-100) for more information. Note: QPC43OF or later vintage is required.
Peripheral Equipment cards 49 QPC450 CO/FX/VVATS Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Interfaces four 600 or 900 GJ CO, FX or WATS trunks with the system in l.t-Law applications. The card can also detect ringing on either the tip or ring leads and has provision to extend the normal loop range fi-om 1200 SL to 2600 n using balanced battery boost from the Central Office. Refer to COIFXIWATS trunk engineering description ( 553-2201-185) for more information.
50 Peripheral Equipment cards DIGITONE station to dc pulses suitable for processing in the system control. Quantity-One per NT8D13 PE Module I QPC723 RS-232 4-Port Interface Line System Hardware-All Purpose-This card provides four direct interfaces to RS-232 asynchronous ASCII computer equipment, such as asynchronous hosts, modems, standard off-the-shelf X.25 Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD), data PABXs and multiplexers.
Station equipment Meridian Modular Telephanes The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective integrated voice and data communication capability.
52 Station equipment - Key Expansion Module Table 1 lists the ordering codes for the Meridian Modular Telephones, alone and with hardware options installed. Table 2 lists the hardware options that can be purchased separately, and Table 3 lists miscellaneous items. Refer to Meridian Modular Telephones-Description and specifications (553-2201-116) for additional information.
Station equipment 53 Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and (continued) Description i faCtory histalled options Ordering code M2008 (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZK08AB-03 NTZK08AB-35 NTZK08AB-93 (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) NTZK08BA-03 NTZK08BA-35 NTZK08BA-93 (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) NTZK08BB-03 NTZK08BB-35 NTZK08BB-93 (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) M2008 (with Display) Black C
54 Station equipment Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory (continued) Description inktalled options Ordering code M2616 (with Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZKl6BA-03 NTZK16BA35 NTZK16BA-93 M2616 (with MPDA and Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZK16BB-03 NTZK16BB-35 NTZK16BB-93 (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) M2016S (basic) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZK20AA-03 (with power board) NTZK20AA-35 (with power board) NTZK20
Station equipment 55 Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and (continued) Description , factory installed options Ordering code M2016S (with Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2016S (withMPDA (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) NTZK20BB-03 NTZK20BB-35 NTZK20BB-93 (with power board) (with power board) (with power board) and Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2216ACP1 Display) NTZK20BA-03 NTZK20BA-35 NTZK20BA-93 (basic-with ACD Black Chameleon
56 Station equipment Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory (continued) Description iktalled options Ordering code M2216ACP2 (basic-with ACD Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2216ACD-2 NTZK23AA-03 (with power board) NTZK23AA-35 (with power board) NTZK23AA-93 (with power board) (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZK23AB-03 (with power board) NTZK23AB35 (with power board) NTZK23AB-93 (with power board) Equipment identification and ordering information 553
Station equipment 57 Table 2 Ordering codes for optional hardware Description Ordering code Additional Meridian Progfammabie Data Adapter NT2K64WA Power Supply Board Display Module requirements - Power Supply Board (M2008: Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NT2K24WA-03 NT2K24WA35 NT2K24WA-93 ACD Display Module Power Supply Board (M2008; Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NT2K25YH-03 NT2K25YH-35 NT2K25YH-93 I.
58 Station equipment Table 2 Ordering codes for optional hardware (continued) Description Ordering code Additional requirements Double Key Module Footstand Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray PO780203-03 PO78023535 PO780293-93 External Alerter Interface NT2K40WA Power Supply Board Power Supply Board NT2Kl OWA Transformer or closet power 120 V Transformer A0367335 Power Supply Board 240 V Transformer A036791 4 Power Supply Board Equipment identification and ordering information 5533001-154 C.
Station equipment 59 Table 3 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items Description Ordering code Card, Directory Number Black :-.. Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray P O 6 6 5 3 5 2 PO665352 PO652746 Card, key labels PO657709 Lens, Directory Number PO652720 Handset Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray A0338908 A0329 173 A03291 74 Handset cord, 2.7m. (9 ft) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray A0334590 A031 8327 A031 8330 Handset cord, 3.6 m.
60 Station equipment Table 3 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items (continued) Ordering code Set User Guide (regular) PO703991 Set Reference Card PO704094 - Display Module Reference Card PO704096 Display PO706836 Installation Sheet Meridian Programmable Data Adapter User Guide PO705986 M2216ACD PO704747 User Guide PO705952 ACD Reference Card M2000 series digital telephones The following types of M2000 digital telephones are available for integrated voice and data communications: - The M20
Station equipment 61 An asynchronous data option circuit board (NTlFO9) and data option power supply (NFS50220-04Ll) are available for the M2000 series digital telephones to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets. For additional information on these telephones, refer to M2000 Digital Telephones - Description, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance (553-2201-110).
62 Station equipment - The M2250 is a digital version of the.Ml250, offering additional features. A digital link connects the M2250 to the switch. Refer to MI250 and M22.50 Attendant ConsoIes description (553-2201-117) for additional information. Attendant administration overlay template This plastic overlay is placed over the attendant console to indicate the key functions when using the Attendant Administration feature. Order number is PO613887.
Station equipment 63 If QCW4E or later vintage is used, either a.QMT4C must be used or the QMT4A or QMT4B must be used as standalone cradles. QMTI 1 asynchronous/ synchronous interface module The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (AS&I) is similar to the QMT9 but provides added dialing capabilities and six data feature keys and associated lamps and data control switches. Refer to SL-1 Data Feature General description andprovisioning (553-2731-100) for more information.
64 Station equipment QKKI handsfree remote powering kit This kit is used to modify SL- 1 telephone sets for use with the QUS 1 Logic handsfiee unit and to extend the SL-1 set operating range from 1830 m (6000 ft) to 2438 m (8000 ft). It requires a 24 V ac local transformer (ordered separately). This kit is field-installable inside a set. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, AddOn Modules, interface kits and Meridian Ml000 Series Telephones description (553-2001-l 10) for more information.
Station equipment 65 - no supplementary power is required :.>; .::. ..~ ‘L_.. , 4 _ .-:I:--” .._, _ ._.. ..._ QSR2 venture 1 headset This set is used in conjunction with the QKNl headset kit to provide head telephone set operation. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules, interface kits and Meridian Ml 000 Series Telephones description (553-2001-110) for more information.
66 Station equipment Telephones -Description, installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-l 10) for more information. - NTlFlOAA printed circuit board assembly and housing for M3000 digital touchphone. Refer to Meridian h43000 Touchphone Description, installation, operation, and ma@tenance (553-2201-l 15) for additional information. ,-,..‘..F 1. .c;. ___ “;.‘“.‘-,.
Station equipment 67 .. :”.; .; .,.-,’ l, . . s”Tz$ ‘C\ ” ,’ separately in 2 m (7 ft), 4 m (14 ft), qr 7.5 m (25 ft) lengths for conversion of existing SL-1 sets. These assemblies are compatible only with the Teledapt jacks designed for the system. Station equipment replaceable items Table 4 lists the individual parts of the station equipment that are fieldreplaceable. These parts may be ordered by using the given apparatus number. _: .I j . :y: .. ... I-. . .. . . ^ /: .‘ . . ,..: .: ,: :::: . .
68 Station equipment Table 4 Station equipment replaceable items Equipment GICW-Type Attendant Consoles Replaceable items Apparatus number Cover Assembly PO538435 Attendant 3CWl , QCW2 only QCW3, QCW4 only (see Note) M2006, M2008, M2016S, M2216, and M2616 sets Administration - c Overlay PO61 3887 Console Caps Package PO58631 2 Bezel PO567037 Bezel PO578254 Dial Pad PO536503 LED Assembly (1 strip) PO548801 LED Assembly (2 strips) PO548799 LED Assembly (3 strips) P O 5 4 8 8 0 0 L
Station equipment 69 Table 4 Station equipment replaceable items (continued) Equipment Replaceable items Apparatus number Chameleon Ash AQ318327 Dolphin Gray A031 8330 Handset Cord (3.6 m/l 2 ft) All Sets and Consoles I Black A0274233 Chameleon Ash A0274243 Dolphin Gray A031 4423 Line Cord A0346862 Card Holder PO535652 Filler Plate PO523535 Note: The QCW3 houses one QPC246, one QPC247 and one QPC248. The QCW4 houses one QPC247 and two QPC248 PCBs (right and left).
70 Station equipment Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 .
71 Cabling The cables are differentiated by the cabling method used. Two types of cables are available. Intra-UEM cables are cables that connect to different cards within a UEM, or cables that go to the I/O connector panels at the rear of the UEM. Intra-UEM cables are not shielded. These cables arc typically round and use bail locks or screws to prevent accidental removal. Inter-UEM cables are cables that are routed internally between UEMs.
72 Cabling NT8D40AA AC power cord Purpose-This cable conducts AC power into the pedestal for AC systems. It is 9.1 m (30 ft) long. NT8D40AM module-to-module power harness Purpose--This power wiring harness is used in AC modules to connect the input AC power and speed control signals vertically through the column. It is constructed in a modular form, and can be disconnected when necessary to allow for the removal and/or replacement of modules.
Cabling 73 NT8D46AD System Monitbr SDI cable ‘/ PurpoeThis cable is used to connect an SD1 card to the System Monitor. It replaces the NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable when the SD1 is in the same UEM. i-.:.2-, :j !..,.: ‘c;: !> 1 . .---..“..-:.,i..i :I. NT8D46AG System Monitor to SDI paddle boar’d cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board (dual port).
74 Cabling NT8D46AP Extended System’ Monitor Serial Link cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor from one column to another. This cable is 7.6 m (25 ft) long. NT8D46AQ System Monitor to UPS (Exide) cable PurposeThis cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the Exide UPS. It is used for UPS monitoring. This cable is 13.7 m (45 ft) long.
Cabling 75 NT8D46AW System Monitor to QBL12 cable Purpose----This cable connects the System Monitor to the QBL12 battery distribution box. It is used to monitor the DC power plant. This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long. NT8D46DC Air Probe harness DC Purpose-The Air Probe harness DC is part of the Temperature Sensor Assembly and is used in DC systems. It uses a 36-pin connector. It senses exit air temperature and relates the information to the blower unit.
76 Cabling NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable Purpose-This cable is used to interconnect QF’C471 Clock Controller cards. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D75AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D75AD 1.8 m (6 ft) NT8D76 Intergroup Switch to Inter Group cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QF’C412 Intergroup Switch card to the NT8D36AA Inter Group Module. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D76AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D76AD 1.8 m (6 ft) - NT8D76AE 2.
Cabling 77 NT8D78AA CPU cable __i .: ‘: I : ..I.:. . 1 ;::.> . .Y,’ ,...-. _. :_:.:I .., tI_ ..-. .,. ..I : -’ ‘. ; --; Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC580 CPU Interface card to QPC579 CPU Function card. This cable is 5 cm (2 in.) long. NT8D79 PRVDTI to Clock Controller cable Purpose--This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI card to the QPC471 Clock Controller card. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D79AB 0.6 m (2 ft) - NT8D79AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D79AD 1.
78 Cabling - NT8D80AF 3m(lOft) - NT8DSOAG 3.6 m (12 ft) - NT8D80A.I 4.8 m (16 ft) - NT8D80AL 6 m (20 ft) - NTSDSOAP 7.6 m (25 ft) NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect a line card to the I/O connector panel. This cable is 50 cm (20 in.) long.
_: Cabling 79 NT8D84AA SDI paddle board (dual. port) to I/O cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board (dual port) to the I/O connector panel. This cable is 45.7 cm (18 in.) long.
80 Cabling NT8D86 Network to I/O cablePurpose!-This cable is used to connect the following to the I/O connector panel: - QPC414 Network card - PRIlDTIcard - QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card - NT8D47RPE This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D86AC 1.5 m (5 ft) - NT8D86AD 1.8 m (6 ft) NT8D87 Conference/TDS to music trunk cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D17AA Conference/IDS card to the music trunk or I/O connector panel.
Cabling 81 NT8D91 Network to Controller cable Purpose-This cable is used for internal cabling to connect NT8DO4 Superloop Network card to NT8DOlAD Controller-2 or NT8DOlAC Controller-4 card. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D91AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D91AD 1.8 m (6 ft) - NT8D91AE 2.4 m (8 ft) - NT8D91AF 3 m (loft) - NT8D91AG 3.6 m (12 ft) - NT8D9lAI 4.8 m (16 ft) - NT8D91AP 7.6 m (25 ft) - NT8D91AT 10.6 m (35 ft) - NT8D91AV 13.
82 Cabling - QPC513 Enhanced Se&l Data Interface - QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface - QPC687 CPU with SDI/ RTC This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D95A.I 4.8 m (16 ft) - NT8D95AT 10.3 m (34 ft) - NTSD95AW 14.6 m (48 ft) 97AX PRllDTl - to MWDF cable Purpose-This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the MDF via the I/O connector panel. This cable is 15.2 m (50 ft) long.
Cabling 83 NT8D99 CPU to Network cable Purpose-This cable is used to:interconnect NT8D35 NET Modules in full group configuration This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D99AR 0.6 m (2 ft) - NT8D99AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NTm99AD 1.8 m (6 ft) - NT9J93AD PRVDTI Echo Canceler to I/O cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI Echo Canceler port to the I/O connector panel. This cable is 1.8 m (6 ft) long.
84 Cabling NT9J97 Intra-column Network cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8DO4AA Superloop Network card to the I/O connector panel in a QCA55 cabinet. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT9J97AC 1 m (40 in.) - NT9J97AD 1.8 m (70 in.) - NT9J97AE 2.2 m (85 in.) - NT9J97AG 3.6 m (12 ft) - NT9J97AH 4.3 m (14 ft) - NT9J97AJ 4.
Cabling 85 QCADI 28 connector cable Purpose-Connects QPC472 DTI Carrier Interface (J5) connector to the cabinet filter panel. It is a 15-conductor flat ribbon cable with a U-pin D-type female connector at one end and a 15-pin D-type male connector at the other. QCAD274A AC power cord Purpose-This cable conducts AC power to the NT6D52AA rectifier. It is 2.7 m (9 ft) long. Equipment identification and ordering information .. : .
06 Cabling Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
87 Miscellaneous equipment Field Wiring Kit System Hardware-All Purpose-The NT6D54AA Field Wiring Kit is used in conjunction with the System Monitor to QBLl5 cable. It provides the necessary hardware to connect four NT6D52AA rectifiers to a System Monitor. .. Blank Faceplates System Hardware-All Purpose-An NT7DOSAA blank faceplate is required in a slot reserved for the Ringing Generator when the Ringing Generator is not in place. .
68 Miscellaneous equipment N o t e : This kit does not include the cable tray. Earthquake Bracing Kit System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides a means to hold together all modules that are stacked up in vertical expansion so that in the case of an earthquake, the whole column will move as a unit. Used only for non-raised floor.
Miscellaneous equipment 89 Table 5 Order Numbers for BIX Designation Labels for NT8D13 PE Modules Description Color Order number Basic 500/2500 set labels (eight circuits per card).
90 Miscellaneous equipment Northern Telecom Publicatidns Northern Telecom Publications are packaged in standard Northern Telecom binders to support the various Meridian 1 systems.
91 List of terms ACD Automatic Call Distribution ASIM Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module BPS Bits Per Second BTU Bus Terminating Unit CAS Centralized Attendant Service cc Clock Controller CE Common Equipment CMA Changeover Memory Arbitrator co Central Office CPU Central Processing Unit Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
92 List of terms CRT Cathode Ray Tube DCE Data Communication Equipment DCHI D-Channel Handler Interface DID Direct Inward Dialing DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTl Digital Trunk Interface DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTR Digitone Receiver EIA Electronics Industry Association FDI Floppy Disk Interface FDU Floppy Disk Unit HSDC High-Speed Data Card IGS Intergroup Switch I/O Input/Output Equipment identification and ordering information 5533001-154
List of terms 93 ISDLC Integrated Services Digital Line card Integrated Services Digital Network LRE Logic Return Equalizer MCDS Multi-Channel System MDF Main Distribution Frame MDU Multi-Disk Unit MSI Mass Storage Interface MSU Mass Storage Unit OAID Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial OANI Outgoing Automatic Number Identification OPX Off-Premises Extension PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler PBX Private Branch Exchange b... . ,:,:y;.7.-. , . . , . . ; : .‘.,.,..” : ;; -.
94 List of terms PE Peripheral Equipment PRA Primary Rate Access PRI primary Rate Interface RAM Random Access Memory RAN Recorded Announcement ROM Read-Only Memory RPE Remote Peripheral Equipment SBE Segmented Bus Extender SCG System Clock Generator SDI Serial Data Interface TCM Time Compression Multiplexing TDS Tone and Digit Switch UEM Universal Equipment Module ^-. . _../ .:.j I ,; Equipment identification and ordering information ..
List of terms 95 UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply 3-Port Extender Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Equipment identification and ordering information 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. R e l e a s e 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. Et narthorn t~lacom . . .
ti northtzrn telecom PRACTICE 553-2201-180 Issrzid: 88 01 27 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONES l LINE ENGINEERING CONTENTS The module indicated by a bullet (@) in the checklist has been revised. The reason for this revision is given in tbe first page of the af f acted module. Note: Prinkd in U.S.A.
.:- . .
CHECKLIST pzizJFq ITEM ISSUE DATE cxoooo Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard 86 06 05 l-P 0010 DP 1001 DP 1002 DP 1003 DP 1004 DP 1005 DP 1006 DP 1007 IX 9999 86 06 05 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE pjgFFJq NOTES Note: This module is reissued to change the minimum loop length requirement to 100 ft. and to add metric equivalents. (I) Cable pair selections must meet the following requirements: l AC signal loss must be less than 12.
E N G I N E E R -1 T E L E P H O N E L I N E -[ 11 Select (another) loop that meets the criteria for cable length. (DP 1001) .[21-l . . Is there a bridge UP? l l No c31-. l Is there another . loop available? l l .0 . l .. Yes .7 rl step 1 Remove the bridge tap.
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE .[ 51 .[61 . 0 Is the loop length . less than 2.1 kft? l @No l a . - . . Yes . l No . l - . a 0 . .- . a Is there any 26 . AWG cable in the loop? . l Yes l step 9 L&l -[ 71 Calculate the loop resistance (DP 1002) .[ 81 l l 0 Is the resistance less 0 than 175 Ohm? . No a . . .[91l Is the PBXat the . Central Office? l l * Yes l 0 . . Doesthelooppass the loop diagnostic test? (DP 1003) . Repair the problem. l . . . . .
ENGINEER 11 T E L E P H O N E LINE . [121 . 0 . . Is the Impulse noise- 0 within limits? (DP . 1004) No 0 . .I131 -. l . Is the background noise within limits? l l No 0 . l rl step 1 Page 2 Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check &51-~ .. Is the performance l l . . _ . .. .. “ . I ,...- . _ . .. . . . .._,. _I . :,... : ..;: 1 :‘.
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE pz+Fffj . [ 161 . 0 Is there another pair . available? l . No . a . cl step 18 .Wl-. Isthisthesecond . time around? l l . . No . 0 . . 0 I -[181 Collect more detailed loop data and calculate EPL (DP 1006) l [ 191 . . Is EPL less than 12.0 . . dB? l 0 .
Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check performance if not l t211 I* Is the performance OK? l . l ’ . No . . . . . YSS step 22 A . [22l l l 0 --A . Are the loop diagnostics and noise measurement already done? . l Yes . . a l 0 . step 21 Page 8 No q!l Perform loop diagnostics and noise measurements. (DP 1003, DP 1004 and cl Step 24 Page I .. :.. I. :.
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE -1 . [241 . Are impulse noise . and background noise within limits? . l l l l l Is the problem fixed? Yes . l No . . [261 -. 0 Is the performance . OK? .
E -1 N G I N E E R TET L I N E -[2n Measure the dc loop resistance. (DP 1007) l l .l . [281 1[291-, 0 Is the loop resistance less than 175 Ohm? . Install new cable. . No . - r--E301 L, Measure loop insertion loss at 256 kHz. l l . . [311 --J----. Is the insertion loss 0 less than 12.0 dB? l Yes .:. . . .. _ _ .i.-.2. .. . .
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE p%JFffj Replace any under-carpet cable if insertion loss can be reduced. Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check . [341-. 0 Is the performance 0 . OK? l Yes . . . . . . .
-1 E N G I N E E R TEL? L I N E Table 0010-A POSSIBLE FAULTS l l l EM1 Unrecorded bridge taps Under-carpet cable l Split cable pairs l Impulse noise - not recorded due to speed limitations of the impulse counter. l Faulty telephone .
SELECT A LOOP -1 NOTES 0.01 The requirements for a Meridian Digital Telephone are that the loop be without bridge taps, and be less than 175 Ohm dc resistance. and less than 12.0 dB loss at 256 kHz. For a single gauge cable, the-length limits are 3000 ft for 22 and 24 AWG cable and D inside wiring, and 2100 ft for 26 AWG cable. 0.02 The allowable loop length assumes that there is no under-carpet cable.
L..j. .t. . .\ :.fY : :,:.
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE pJ%$qy Chart 1002-l CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE STEP 1 PROCEDURE Calculate the dc loop resistance by adding the resistance of each cable section. Calculate the resistance of each cable section using the following formula (Cable resistances are given in Table 1002-A.
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE Table 1002-A CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE PER UNIT Gauge E 22 19 Ohm per loop kft 83 52 33 16 Ohm per loop km 218 173 109 54
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS p&qFJy Chart 1 PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS APPARATUS: 01 Volt-Ohmeter (VOM) 1 77 Cable Analyser or l STEP eqUiValent PROCEDURE FOREIGN VOLTAGE TEST 1 Set the VOM range switch to a scale 60 Vdc/Vac or more. 2 Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distributing frame. 3 Measure the dc and ac voltage between the following points under no-load conditions.
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS Chart 1 Continued PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS STEP PROCEDURE CAPACITANCE 1 UNBALANCE TEST Using the 77 Cable Analyser or equivalent, measure the capacitance between the following points: l l T and GND R and GND Requirement: Difference between the two readings should be <0.002 microfarads. .. :.
MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE -1 Chart 1004-l MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE STEP 1 PROCEDURE Measure impulse noise on selected lines during busy hours. Use an NE-58B Noise measurement set, or equivalent. Note: The termination and weighting filter required are 135 Ohm and 100 kHz respectively. and the blanking interval 25 microseconds. 2 Using Figure 1004-L Determine that for a given loop loss and noise threshold, the impulse noise counts per 15 minutes are below the corresponding curve.
1 Page 2 of 2 1 1004 5 5 3 - 2 2 0 1 - 1 8 0 1 DP Standard ) 86 01 27 MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE 1000 100 Loss in di3 Fig. 1004-l Maximum Allowable Impulse Noise Counts Versus Loop Loss s. ..: ...
MEASURE BACKGROUND NOISE -1 Chart 1005-l 1 Measure background noise on the loop using an NE-58B noise measuring set. The weighting and termination to be used are 100 kHz flat and 135 Ohm respectively. Note: 2 Reject the loop being tested if the background noise measured is not less than 5ldBrn.
..;:p. :: : : .:]1 ‘:,-. .. .
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL p%JFfg Chart 1006-l COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL (EXPECTED PULSE LOSS) STEP 1 PROCEDURE Collect loop makeup data between the line card and the terminal, For each cable section, the data required is: the cable type (PIG or pulp) gauge length type of plant construction (underground. aerial, inbuilding) Calculate individual cable section losses using the figures in Tables 1006-A. 1006-B, .. 1006-C. and the following equation.
COLLECT Chart 1006-l Continued COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA (EXPECTED PULSE LOSS) STEP AND LOOP MAKEUP CALCULATE DATA EPL PROCEDURE Reject loops whose expected pulse loss is not less than 12.0 6 EXAMPLE Section 1: Mainframe bulkhead to DFl - 500m. 26 AWG PIC, underground Section AND 2: DFl to DF2 - 200m. 26 AWG PIC, inside Section 3: DF2 to terminal - 24 AWG NT D-inside Therefore: SLl = 0.5km, SL2 = 0.2km, SL3 = O.lkm From Tables 1006A and 1006C: Ll = 13.7 dB/km. L2 = 13.7 dB/km. L3 = 13.
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE Table 1006-A CABLE ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ AND 21.1 =‘C 170’ j j ,, ,! 26 A W G i.L:.::.:.-.., .._--..:.:. r-;.~.-.;~.+; ““. ,.._.:; ; dB/kft 4.2 .4.3 PIG PULP 24 A W G dB/km 13.7 14.3 dB/kft 3.1 3.5 EPL F)’ 22 A W G dB/km 10.2 11.4 dB/kft 2.5 2.1 19 A W G dB/km dB/kft dB/km 5.6 6.6 Table 1006-B ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ FOR U/C CABLE W E 4 pairs dB/kft 3.6 dB/km 15.3 A M P 25 pair dB/kft 19.0 dB/km 63.
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL 7 , , , , , , , , , 6. 5 4 3- 2. 1 0 ““““I 20 L Cable Characteristic Fig. 1006-l Junction Loss vs Cable Characteristic Impedance .. Impedance in Ohms ,i ,. : : ‘: _. ,I . . . .. . a. ::-” : 3 ‘.. .
MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE p%Jflg Chart 1007-l MEASURE LOOP RESISTANCE STEP 1 PROCEDURE Measure loop resistance using standard procedures. Note: The dc loop resistance limit of 175 Ohm should be reduced by 1 Ohm for each 1% of the total loop that is aerial cable.
.., . . .-; .I ..:) :, .. . ./’ %.
PROCEDURE TITLE NUMBER CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE DP 1002 CHECKLIST CKoooo COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE TP 0010 INDEX Ix 9999 BACKGROUND NOISE DP lQo5 MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE DP 1007 MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE DP 1004 PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS SELECT A LOOP I DP 1006 ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE MEASURE ; EPL . .-.... ._. ..~,‘-’ :.:c ,‘-.-.. -._... ; .Y’..’ -‘. ._ .-;. ::, .. ,.
..
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Issued: 85 06 15 Standard northem tdaconl INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-1% SUMMARY OF TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS CONTENTS 1. u-LAW 2. A-LAW 3. D T I PAGE TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS TRANSMISSION L O S S PARAMETERS T A B L E S l-l 2-l 3 - 1 Tables 1-A Insertion Loss at 1020 Hz (““Connections Between Analog Ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - B Frequency Response (Amplitude Distortion) 1 - C Overload Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 CONTENTS 3-A 3-B 3-c 3-D PAGE 1000 Hz Insertion Loss for ConnectIons between an Analog Port and a Digital Trunk Interface IDTI) Port 1000 Hz Insertion Loss for Connections’ between Two Ports of a Digital Trunk interface (DTI) _.
PRACTICE 553 -2201-182 1. u-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which Meridian SL-1 is destgned to meet or exceed in M-Law applications. The specified performance applies in the temperature range of 0 to 50° C. 1.01 1.02 Unless otherwise specified. all specifications are stated in terms of being met by 95% of connections.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-C OVERLOAD LEVELS TYPE OF CIRCUIT NOMINAL OVERLOAD LEVEL (dBm) RECEIVE (AID) TRANSMIT (D/A) Line Trunk Receive and Transmit relate to Switch. Note: Table 1-D TRACKING (LINEARITY) INPUT SIGNAL (dB) BELOW OVERLOAD TRACKING ERROR (dB) MAXIMUM AVERAGE +3 to -40 &OS i-o.25 -40 to -53 k1.0 +0.5 Note I: Signal at 1020 Hz. Note 2: Maximum specification for 99% of all connections. ..
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-F INPUT IMPEDANCE CONNECTION FROM 4W TRUNK TO PORT REFERENCE IMPEDANCE FREQUENCY RANGE MINIMUM RETURN LOSS Line 600 R 200-500 Hz 500-3400 Hz 2 0 dB 2 6 dB Trunk 600 R 200-500 Hz 500-1000 Hz 1000-3400 Hz 20 dB 2 6 dB 3 0 dB Note 1: This parameter is for EIA-compatible trunks only. Note 2: A reference impedance of 600 R resistive is used.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-I IMPULSE NOISE CONNECTION NUMBER OF COUNTS ABOVE 55 dBrnC AH 0 Note: Table 1-J INTERMODULATION For test purposes. a five-minute couiiting interval is used. DISTORTION CONNECTION TYPE DISTORTION LIMITS (dB BELOW RECEIVED LEVEL) TEST SIGNAL INPUT LEVEL R2 R3 (dBm) Line-to-Line 40 43 - 9 Line-to-Trunk 45 53 -9 at line -13 at trunk Trunk-to-Trunk 45 53 -13 Note 1: Four-tone method is used.
PRACTICE Table 1-L QUANTIZATION 553-2201-182 D I S T O R T I O N INPUT LEVEL BELOW OVERLOAD SIGNAL/DISTORTION RATIO (dB) +3 to -33 33 -33 to -43 27 -43 to -48 22 +I Input signal is 1 kHz sinewave: output measured with 4 C-message weighting. (See Table 1-C for overload definition.) Note: Table 1-M CROSSTALK CONNECTION MINIMUM CROSSTALK ATTENUATION (dB) Line-to-Line Line-to-Trunk Trunk-to-Trunk Note: >75 >I5 >I5 Input frequency range of 200 to 3200 Hz, 0 dBm level. .
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-O RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements) CONNECTION FROM 4W VNL TIE TRUNKTOTHE FOLLOWING: CIRCUIT TERMINATION ECHO RETURN LOSS LOW/HIGH SINGING RETURN _ LOSS NOTES 4W VNL Tie Trunk (through balance) 4W legs of Hybrid terminated in 600/900R 21 20120 1.3 4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk (terminal balance) 600/9OOrr + 2.16 UF at distant PBX 22 15/U 1.3 2W Non-VNL Tie Trunk (terminal balance) 600/900R + 2.16 UF at distant PBX 18 lO/lO 1.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 2. A-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 2.01 :;*; :z:’i The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which Meridian SL-1 is designed lo meet on 95% of all connections in A-Law applications. , . _. :. .-;. .:..\1 . _ r,. I:.._.y.;.. .. ..Ijl,.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-C RETURN LOSS (Design Requirements) CONNECTION Line ECHO RETURN LOSS (d8) SFRL LOSS id81 >18 >21 >12 >19 >22 >21 >14 >19 (300-3200 Hz) Interfaces: Line Side (Note 1) 4W Trunk Side (Note 2) 2W Trunk Interfaces: 2W Trunk Side (Note 2) 4W Trunk Side (Note 2) The design requirements in this table are intended to ensure the satisfaction of the in-service requirements in Table 2-D. are: - 6OOQ for SL-1 line - 60012 and 2.16 UF for PBX.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-D RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements) CONNECTION FROM 4W VNL TIE TRUNK TO THE FOLLOWING: CIRCUIT TERMINATION ECHO RETURN LOSS LOW/HIGH SINGING RETURN LOSS NOTES 4W VNL Tie Trunk (through balance) 4W legs of Hybrid terminated in 600~ 21 20/20 I,3 4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk (terminal balance) 600R •k 2.16 ,AF at distant PBX 22 15/u 1.3 + 2W Non-VNL Tie Trunk (terminal balance) 600R i- 2.16 uF at distant PBX 18 lO/lO 1.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-E DISTORTION AND MODULATION PRODUCTS DISTORTION TYPE INPUT LEVEL (d8) BELOW OVERLOAD INPUT FREQUENCY/s (Hz) (excluding submultiples of 8 kHz) MAXIMUM LEVEL OF DISTORTION PRODUCT Harmonic 3 700-1100 340 dB below fundamental output signal Intermodulation 13 300-3400 (see Note) a35 dB below fundamental output signal Sideband Suppression 3 700-1100 340 dB below fundamental output signal Quantization o-33 700-1100 333 dB 33-43 700-1100 321 dB 43-48 700-1100
PRACTICE Table 2-G DELAY DISTORTION ENVELOPE 553-2201-182 - BANDWIDTH (Hz) ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION (,us) LINE-LINE LINE-TRUNK/ TRUNK-LINE/ TRUNK-TRUNK 1 0 0 0 to 2600 380 190 1 1 5 0 to 2300 300 150 800 to 2700 750 375 Note: The limits above apply to 95% of all connections. Table 2-H CROSSTALK CONNECTION CROSSTALK AlTENUATlON (dB) Line-to-Line Line-to-Trunk Trunk-to-Trunk >75 >75 >75 Frequency range of test signal 0.2 to 3.4 kHz at -10 dBm.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-K MESSAGE CIRCUIT NOISE NOISE LEVEL CONNECTION dl3mOp dBrn 3 kHz FLAT G-65 ~29 (a) Trunk side (b) Line side 6-65 ~-65 <29 629 Trunk-to-Trunk (2 dB pads out) e-65 ~29 Line-to-Line Line-to-Trunk: Table 2-L IMPULSE NOISE With all circuits at the MDF correctly terminated. the impulse noise measured at line terminals should be as follows.
PRACTICE Table 2-N ClUANTlZATlON DISTORTION 553-2201-182 - INPUT LEVEL BELOW OVERLOAD SIGNAL/DISTORTION RATIO (dB) 3 to 33 33 33 to 43 21 43 to 48 22 Input signal is 820 Hz sinewave: output measured with psophometric weighting. (See Table 2-J for a definition of overload.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 3. DTI LOSS TABLES +I 3.01 Tables 3-A through 3-D provide the insertion loss specifications of the SL-1 Business Communications System when it is equipped with a QPC472 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI). 3.02 The insertion loss for connections between analog ports of the SL-1 and the DTl or beteween DTI ports is connection-specific in order to be compatible with end-to-end network connection loss requirements. SL-1’ connection loss specifications are in agreement with U.S.
PRACTICE I+ 553-2201-182 Table 3-A 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BEiWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT TYPE OF CONNECTION ANALOG PORT Station to Trunk Analbg port to DTI DTI to Analog port Tie Trunk 3 9 Local Station CO/FX/WATS 3 3 Local Station Toll WATS (Note 1) 3 9 OPS Tie Trunk 0 6 OF5 CO/FX/WATS 0 0 OF5 Toll WATS (Note 1) 0 6 Tie Trunk Tie Trunk -2 4 Tie Trunk CO/FX/WATS 3 3 Tie Trunk Toll WATS (Note 1) -2 4 Tie Trunk -2.
PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 3-8 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECilONS BETWEEN.
PRACTICE P 553-2201-182 Table 3-C 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS-BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF CONNECTION Station to Satellite Tie Trunk Non-satellite Trunk to Satellite Tie Trunk Satellite Tie Trunk to DTI Trunk ANALOG PORT DIGITAL PORT (Note 1) NOMINAL _ INSERTION LOSS (dB) Analog port to DTI DTI to Analog port Local Station Comb. STT 3 9 Local Station Digital STT 3 3 OPS Comb. STT 0 6 OP.
. PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 3-C Continued 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF CONNECTION ANALOG PORT DIGITAL PORT (Note 1) NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS (d8) Analog port to DTI DTI to Analog port STT-ESN CO/FX/WATS 0.5 0.5 STT-ESN Toll WATS (Note 2) 0.5 6.5 Note 1: DTI port to Combination or Digital Satellite Tie Trunks KIT) unless otherwise noted.
PRACTICE 553 -2201-182 r Table 3-D 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BiTWEEN TWO PORTS OF A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF CONNECTION Satellite Trunk to Trunk Note 1: Note 2:. Note NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS DIGITAL PORT (A) (Note 1) DIGITAL PORT (Note 1) DTI port (A) to DTI port (B) DTI port (B) to DTI port (A) Comb. STT Comb. STT 0 0 Comb. STT Digital STT 6 0 Comb. STT Tie Trunk (non-satellite) 0 0 (8) Comb. STT CO/FX/WATS 6 0 Comb.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Standard nit norf horn tulacom Meridian I
.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Publication number: 553-3001-l 61 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O - 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Analog line card description .. . . .
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1 .
iii About this document This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTI3DO3AB Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release. The following documents should be used as references to this document: References See.
iv About this document - XII software management (553-3001-300) - XII features and services (553-3001-305) See the SL-I XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of alI administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
V Contents General information Application 2 Characteristics I. Functional Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance Insertion loss Frequency response Message channel noise Power requirements Foreign and surge voltage protections Overload level Analog line card description ..
vi Contents Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61
1 General information This publication outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. The following Analog Line Card is available: - NT8DO3AB - Analog Line Card (p-Law) The Analog Line Card provides talk battery and signaling for regular 2-wire common battery 500~type (rotary dial), 2500~type (DIGITONE dial) telephones and key telephone equipment.
2 Summary Application - The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 1. Table 1 Line circuit application and compatibility Equipment Specifications NE-500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent) Dial Speed 8.0 to 22.5 pps Percent Break 58 to 70% Interdigital Time 240 ms NE-2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent) Frequency Accuracy + 1.5 % Pulse Duration 40 ms Interdigital Time 40 ms Speed 12.
Summarv 3 Characteristics Functional The Analog Line Card contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes The Analog Line Card also provides the following: ..
4 Summary Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line conkction, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB + 1dB. This is arranged as 3.5dB loss for analog to PCM and 2.5dB loss for PCM to analog.
Summary 5 Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBmC. A technical summary of the Analog line c&it pack is’given in Table 3.
6 Summary Power requirements - NT8D03AB The NlSDO3AB Analog Line Card has the following power requirements: Tolerance Idle Active Current Current Voltage (+/-I Max + 150Vdc 0.50 V dc 48 ma Oma 48 ma + 8.5 Vdc l.OOVdc 150 ma 8ma 280 ma - 48.0 V dc 2.40 V dc 48 ma 40 ma 688 ma - 48.0 V dc 2.40 V dc Oma (1)lOma 320ma 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac Oma (2) 10 ma 160 ma -150.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 ma 2ma 1 32 ma Note: (1) Each active ringing relay requires 10 ma of battery voltage.
:.. I . -8.. -... . . :1 -,_.-..- ., ! :: ‘.- .- ,,’ .. : :.
.- SL-1 System Options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A. n# nartharn tolocom .
_ .I _., _... .., .-. ,, __ . ,.,.-.. . ,.... :. , I .“,:: I; IL:i .I SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description Standard : I ; .,.-y. ‘. _.: ..; . . ,. _ :.‘T :‘. ,’ .’ ; Et ..x .
.. .: :. . ...:.; . _ .1 ..: .
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description- Publication number: 5533001-l 62 Document status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O . . ,..’ 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved.
ii Revision history Januaty29,1990 First issue of this document. Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62 s.
iii About this document This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTt3DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC). The information is intended tc be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release.
iv About this document - XII Software Management (553-3001-300) - Xl1 Features and Services (553-3001-305) See the SL-I XII Input/Output Guide (553-300140) for a description of all administration programs, maintenance proms, and system messages.
V Contents General information 1 Requirements 1 Description 3 Meridian SL-1 data block Physical Functional Configuration Power supply to digital telephones Characteristics ..
vi Contents Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
General information The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is based on the design of the QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line Card. See 553-2201-193 for a complete description of the QPC578. The Dgtl LC is a voice and data communication link between the Meridian SL-1 switch and modular digital telephones. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous ASCII terminal or PC can be connected to SL-1 System .through the digital telephone.
2 General information Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
! :i , ,’ _.: .::. .I .: -:;;::: _. _ c _ . 5 T 7’; : _’ .- 3 Description The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is equipped with 16 identical line circuits housed within an NTSD37AA Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (IPE). Each line circuit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a a-wire full duplex 5 12 KHz Time Compression Multiplexed (KM) digital link. .
4 Description Functional The Dgtl LC contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes Configuration Up to 16 Dgd LC circuit packs can be mounted in one PE shelf if the remaining slots are not used. In addition, up to 16 Dgtl LC packs can be supported by a single NT8DO6AA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE ._ Pwr Sup).
5 Characteristics Table 1 Digital Llne Card circuit characteristics Characteristics Description Circuits per pack 16 voice, 16 data Options Nil Impedance 1008 .. Loop limits 100 ft (30 m) to 3000 ft (900 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable kl5 VDC at 80 mA)l 0 to 3500 ft (1067 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable &15 VDC at 80 mA)] Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62 ..
6 CharacterisGcs Table 1 continued Digital Line Card circuit characteristics I dharacteristlcs Description Line rate 512kbps&lOOppm Power supply + 5vdc *15vdc +lOVdc Transmitter output voltage -successive “1” bits +1.5&0.15Vand-1.5kO.15V -“On bits 0*50mV Note: The Dgtl LC requires +lW, - lSV, and +5V from the backplane.
.. SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description 8 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1 System options 21, &, 61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Standard Et northern tWocam
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Publication number: 553-3001-l 63 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Analog message waiting line card, description . .I.’ : 553-3001-l 63 .’ : -.
ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.
:,j -1 .‘,:;I’? ,-.. . . . . ., ,...- _.... ,..- . .._ y -::- _ . j iii About this document This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTsDO9AB Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release.
iv About this document - Xl1 softwure management (553-3001-300) - Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305) See the SL-1 XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
V Contents General information 1 Application 3 Characteristics Functional Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance Insertion loss Frequency response Message channel noise Power requirements Foreign and surge voltage protections Overload level Analog message waiting line card description ..
vi Contents Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63 .. .
1 General information This publication outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. The following Analog Message Waiting Line Card is available: - NT8DO9AB - Analog Message Waiting Line Card @-Law) I.
2 General information .- ., . . . .::\..., .e%. .-. ,_.. i: : ::..,..: ::y., :..; Analog message waiting line card description C.
3 Application The line card interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 1. Table 1 Line card application and compatibility Equipment Specifications NE-500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent) Dial Speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps Percent Break 58 to 70% Interdigital Time 240 ms NE-2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent) Frequency Accuracy + 1.5% Pulse Duration 40 ms Interdigital Time 40 ms Speed 12.5 digits/s Analog message waiting line card description ..
4 Application Analog message waiting line card description .
5 Characteristics Functional The Analog Message Waiting Line Card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes The Analog Message Waiting Line Card also provides the following: -- - 6OfIQ balanced terminating impedance - analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines - transmission an
6 Characteristics - correct initialization of all features at power-up - connection of -150 Vdc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps - direct reporting of digit dialed (500 sets) by collecting dial pulses - detection of lamp status - disable/enable-selected circuits for maintenance Analog message waiting line card description .. :..
7 Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB + 1dB. This is arranged as 3SdB loss for analog to PCM and 2.5dB loss for PCM to analog. Frequency response The loss values in the table below are measured relative to the loss at 1 KHz: Table 2 Frequency : .: .: I; ,.... -...:.. _‘. . , ., . _ .,:.
8 Technical summary Message channel noiseThe message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dEImC. A technical summary of the line card is given in Tible 3.
Technical summarv 9 Power requirements NT8DOSAB The NT8DO9AR Analog Message Waiting Line Card has the following power requirements: Table 4 Power requirements Voltage (+/-I Tolerance Idle current + 12.0Vdc 0.36 V dc 48 ma Active current Max Oma 48 m a + 8.0 Vdc 8ma 280 m a - 48.0 Vdc 40 ma 688 m a - 48.0 Vdc (1) 10 ma 320 m a 88.0 V ac (2) 10 ma 160 m a 2ma -150.0 V dc 1 32 m a Note: (1) Each active ringing relay requires 10 ma of battery voltage.
SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A. rEt nartharn talaccrm C.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Issued: 84 01 20 Standard IKTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK c MERIDIAN SL-1. c SL-1 LINE AND CONSOLE LINE PACKS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CONTENTS Printed in C.S.A. .. PAGE 1. GENERAL 2. DESCRIPTION Functions Physical Description Interconnection with Power Supply to Terminals l-l .._ Shelf 3. CIRCUIT 4.
-- r ..
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 1. GENERAL This practice outlines the functions, interconnections, characteristics and operation of the SL-1 Business Communications System, SL-1 Line and Console Line circuit packs. The information is intended to be used as a guide when designing or engineering the connection of apparatus to the line circuit. 1.01 1.
.-
PRACTICE 553 -2201-184 2. DESCRIPTION FUNCTlONS 2.01 The SL-1 and console line circuit packs each contain eight line circuits (see Fig. 2-l). The SL-1 line pack can use all eight circuits, each circuit interfacing to an SL-1 set. The console line pack uses pairs of line circuits to interface to attendant consoles: one pair may be used from the upper four circuits and one pair from the lower four to interface to two consoles.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 I- Printed Circuit Board L Common Circuitry Connector With 2 Rows of 40 Pins Each for Shelf Connections Circuits Fig. 2-l Identification of the Circuits on the Board INTERCONNECTION WITH SHELF 2.06 The IO-pin connector on the rear of the circuit pack connects to an 80-line bus system at the rear of the PE shelf. The bus lines feed into eight multi-pin connectors.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Fig. 2-2 Line Circuit Connection to SL-1 Set - I ..:..-.. I I J :-..I, ~ : ~ : _ I:i ,f Fig.
-- ..
PRACTICE 3. CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS 553-2201-184 _ 3.01 The circuit characteristics of the line pack are listed in Table 3-A.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Table 3-A Continued CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE PACK- TO THE CIRCUIT PACK CHARACTERISTICS AS RELATED PHANTOMED 30 +l V divided as: POWER Audio Pair Level +15 kO.05 v Signaling Pair Level -15 *0.05 v POWER INPUT FROM SHELF BACKPLANE f6, -6, +2.5 V, 30 V dc balanced _.... _^, 5 ‘,_ .’ Page 3-2 Reissued, 85 06 ..
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 4. OPERATION WITH SL-1 SET IDLE CIRCUIT STATES Multiplex control generates and sends scan message to SL-1 set (2.5 ms message every 10 ms). Message is sent via the signaling pair and hybrid transformer (Fig. 4-l). 4.01 SL-1 Set On-Hook. (1) Message detected by Scan and Signal Distributor @SD). (See Fig. 4-2 and 4-3.) (2) No message is being sent to line circuit on signaling pair.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 (14) CE detects dialing and removes dial tone at start of dialing. (15) CE encodes dialed information. (16) Ringback tone on the dam output bus is applied to SL-1 set over audio pair during message time slot assigned by CE (busy tone received if called number is busy). 4.03 Talking Connection. Called number answers. (1) Ringback tone is removed by CE.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 --------------- 1 d-ky I SL-1 Line Circuit II Multiplex -, Control Hybrid Transformer Audio Pair SL-1 Terminal set I I j,” I - Codec I r_ -,- Data out /’ Digital-to- Analog Filter I [ C o d e c 1’ 1 <’ Enable 1 ‘E Shelf 3%kplane to CE) I ’ 1 l L - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ I’ ‘\ \ ‘\- Card Enable J Audio--t(=r----SL-,LineCiCcuit,----l S i g n a l i n g * a- - - - - - - - - - - - - _1 - - ----(=I--------SL-1 Line Circuit 2 ( 1 ll A c=r---SL-1
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 AUDIO I SIGNALING PAIR AMPLIFIER SSD Fig. 4-2 SL-1 Line Circuit Connected to Basic SL-1 Set Page 4-4 PAIR TRANSFORMER . 2.
PRACTICE BASIC ATTENDANT CONSOLE 553-2201-184 - , n LED SIGNALING PAIR 1 + HYBRID TRANSFORMER - X’ 2.37.Kbps SPEAlER 1 ATTENDANT HANDSET , O 1 HEADSET I I ! ( , 1 R 1 VOLUME, 1 BUZZ f++j ;U$;;q TR:ki%MERt”“‘“‘““I 1 NETWORK I‘ 1 ‘-f- CONTROL I . TIMING A SSD (4) I i - 4 AMPLIFIER AND C L O C K EXTRACTOR 1 .= ClCLIAI IUI- HYBRID TRANSFORMER - X’ , .JI”I.-LII.v PAIR 2 2.37 Kbps 4 I I I- - I --A Fig. 4-3 Console Line Circuit Connected to Basic Attendant Console Page 4-5 .. .
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 SSD in SL-1 set sends off-hook signaling to line circuit on signaling pair. 4.06 Terminal Answers. (1) Off-hook signaling data on data input bus during time slot 0 (via multiplex control and buffer). (2) CE detects signaling. (3) CE changes visual signaling on data output bus during time slot 0. Visual signaling is applied to SL-1 set on signaling pair.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184 5. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOREIGN AND SURGE VOLTAGE PROTECTION 5.01 When telephone lines connected to the line circuit are exposed to foreign voltages by direct contact or induction (e.g., power line crosses or lightning), protection devices must be installed on the customer’s premises. These devices must be capable of providing a path to ground from tip to ring for foreign voltages that exceed 600 V peak. OVERLOAD LEVEL 5.
. :: ‘.
rut northern tukcom PRACTICE 553-2201-183 Issued: 88 08 10 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-i. 500/2500 LINE PACKS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CONTENTS PAGE 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..... 1-1 2. DESCRIPTION 3. APPLICATION 3-1 4. C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S F u n c t i o n a l ..,.,....._..,, ,,. _.,.
.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 1. GENERAL This practice outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the 500/2500 line circuit packs. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. 1.01 1.02 The following 500/2500 line packs are availadle: . QPC192 - Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Line pack (+a~) l QPC292 - Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Line pack (A-Law) l QPC452 - Basic 500/2500 Line pack for ~-Law applications l QPC494 .
--
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 2. DESCRIPTION 2.01 All versions of the 500/2500 line packs provide talk battery and signaling for regular 2-wire common battery SOO-type (rotary dial), 2500-type (DIGITONE* dial) telephones and key telephone equipment. The various special versions serve additional purposes as described in Part 4. 2.02 The line circuit packs mount in a Peripheral Equipment (PE) shelf.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 3. APPLICATION 3.01 The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 3-A. Table 3-A LINE CIRCUIT APPLICATION AND COMPATIBILITY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS NE-500 TYPE ROTARY DIAL SETS (or equivalent) Dial Speed 8.0 to 12.0 pps Percent Break 58 to 69% Interdigital Time 240 ms NE-2500 TYPE DIGITONE SETS (or equivalent) Frequency Accuracy k1.5 % Pulse Duration 40 ms Interdigital Time 40 ms Speed 12.
-- .i : : ..
PRACTICE 4. 553-2201-183 CHARACTERISTICS FUNCTIONAL Common Features 4.
PRACTICE 553-2201183 l generate diagnostics ‘an “ERROR 500” message when the Message Waiting lamp is defective or the telephone is unplugged provided -150 V is present. If -150 V is missing (blown fuse) no message is generated under any condition. 4.05 QPC681 and QPC682 Parallel Message Waiting Line packs: l provides the same features as the QPC494‘ and QPCS58 Message Waiting Line packs l provides a -48 V connection to a lamp bank. 4.
PRACTICE TECHNICAL SUMMARY 553-2201-183 4.09 A technical summary of the line circuit pack is given in Table 4-A.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 p LIMITATIONS The maximum number of Ringers that can be connected to each DN loop is shown below: 4.10 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RINGERS QPC452lQPC494 QPC594/QPC789 QPC521/QPC558 -QPC729 LOOP RESISTANCE 1000 850 600 350 Note: 4.11 2 3 i 4 4 i Loop resistance excludes impedance of telephone sets. Supervision limitations are given in Table 4-B. 4.12 To maintain transmission quality, the following shows . the maximum number of Voice Calls (number of telephone sets off-nook.
PRACTICE 4.14 The-WC494 and QPC558. packs power 553-2201-183 have the following typical requirements: VOLTAGE IDLE CURRENT (mA) -150 v, +5% +2.5 V, +0.5% +6 V, +l% -6 V, +l% -48 v, +3% +52 V, +4% 0
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 2: The Meridian SL-1 S QPC501. optional backplane is equipped with only 8 slots. Note P 4.18 When the QPC594, QPC729 or QPC789 Quad Density line card is used with the QPC659 (note) Dual Loop buffer, there are no restrictions to the number of packs in a Dual Loop shelf. In cabinets equipped with QSD65.Dual QPC8O is required for every 14 PE shelves. Note: Loop shelves, one 4.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 5. OPERATION 5.01 This part contains signaling and supervision operations which apply to the line circuit during various states of operation. Refer to Fig. 5-l for a block diagram of a typical 500/2500 line circuit, Fig. 5-2 for a block diagram of the QPC192 and QPC292 packs, and Fig. 5-3 for a c block diagram of the QPC594, QPC729 and QPC789. IDLE CIRCUIT STATE 5.02 The 50012500 Telephone is On-Hook: No current is drawn from the -48 V supply.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 (12) Ringback tone on the data output bus is applied to telephone during message time slot assigned by CE (busy tone received if called number is busy). 5.04 Talking Connection. (1) Called party answers. (2) Ringback tone removed by CE. (3) rp;m~ message time slot,. digital ,voice on data output bus is to telephone via multrplex control, PCM codec, digital-to-analog filter and hybrid transformer.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 (3) Ring &ntrol signal is removed.. Relay Kl is deenergized. (4) Ringing voltage is removed from called telephone. (5) Multiplex control sends off-hook signaling data to CE on the data input bus during time slot 0. (6) CE detects signaling. (7) ztt ymoves ringing signaling on the data output bus during time 5.08 Talking Connection. (1) Circuit and codec enable inputs are received during message time slot assigned by CE.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 (5) The off-hook condition is detected by the line circuit and the lamp control removes the -150 V from the tip and ring of the telephone. The message waiting lamp is deactivated. (6) Telephone goes on-hook. (7) The on-hook condition is detected by the line circuit,, the lamp control places -150 V on the tip and ring of the telephone and restores the message waiting lamp to the lit state. 5.11 Message Waiting Lamp Cancellation from Telephone.
PRACTICE CLASS OF SERVICE AND FEATURES :‘.?.. ^ ._-. . ._. -.,...-.. y..,-. M.,‘...,-;:: .._ .: . . 553-2201-183 All calls originating from and, terminating on stations connected to line and trunk circuits may be controlled with or without attendant assistance. Call restrictions to the exchange network and special services are assigned through unique station/line circuit data blocks contained in the system memory. Similarly, feature assignments are arranged through the same data blocks.
PRACTICE TO 5001 2500 set 553-2201-183 T-. l+l LB& ,Kl c _ Oultiple 2-Wire ---* A’D Filter TO 4-Wire Conversion D/A + Filler + PE Shelf Backplane V’ W l-4-: Audio and Signaling PCWN Phantomed Over These Leads -Enat .
PRACTICE TO 5001 2500 set 553-2201-183 T-. 2-Wire ---* A’D Filler TO CWh Conversior DIA - Filter R-’ On I Audio and Signaling Power LP DETR OMS51A r_-----_--~--~--~--~---~--~-~~~-~~~ T - i 5 0 0 1 2 5 0 0 Line Circuit 1 I R - i L -------------------------------A T 1:-------------------------------600/2500 Line C l r c u l t 2 R-i L-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I I i T i-------------------------------500/2500 Lln.
PRACTICE 553-2201-183 ________________________________________----------------------~-------. P 500/2500 . TO 5001 2500 Set TR- Line Clrcult 0 600 n x Kl, 600 Cl TO 4-Wire Conversion - Control DIA - Filter 6 - .______-_. Dal -0u PE Shelf Backplane CrO W . Enab Audio and Signaling POWN Phantomed Over These Leads CEnab on 46 Vdc Ring Control _----------_-__---~_-------~~~~~~~~ ‘1 5 0 0 1 2 5 0 0 Llna Clreult 1 I fl+ ----------------------B-----------J - - - - - - - - 5oo/2sopun.
nit northern ttdocom PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Issued: 87 08 31 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-I.. QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LlNE CARD DESCRIPTION CONTENTS 1. PAGE QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LINE CARD . . Description F u n c t i o n s :.. .._......... l - l-l l-1 2 This practice is reissued to add further reference information on digital telephones. Changes are indicated by arrows in the margin.
,.., .i. “‘;;.:-.7;;. :, .j..I....._. : ...) I .
PRACTICE 553-2201-193 1. QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LINE CARD The QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) is a voice and data communication link between a Meridian SL-1 and the Meridian M2000/M3000 series of digital telephones. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous ASCII terminal or PC can be connected to Meridian SL-1 through the digital telephone.
PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Each digital telephone and each associated data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal Number (TN) in the Meridian SL-1 data base. 1.05 Meridian SL-i Data Block. ISDLC circuitry is contained on a 320 mm (12.5 in) by 254 mm (10 in) printed circuit board. The faceplate of the pack is equipped with a red LED which lights if the pack is disabled. The rear of the pack is equipped with an IO-pin connector which provides access to: 1.06 Physical.
P R A C T I C E 553 Typical ISDLC Cabling and -2201-193 Cross-Connections (c) Converts the Meridian SL-1 bit interleaved data format to DS-30X+ format and vice versa. 4- (d) Converts Meridian SL-1 SSD (signaling) messages to TCM format and vice versa. (e) Synchronizes the digital telephones and their data options to-the Meridian SL-1. (f) Provides buffering of messages to compensate for different signaling rates The ISDLC consists of the functional blocks shown in Fig. 1-2.
PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Multiplexes-8 integrated voice and data TCM lines into a 2.56 Mbps DS-30X formatted data stream (used internally in the pack) when the transmission is from the digital telephone or associated terminal to the Meridian SL-1. De-multiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS30X formatted data stream into 8 integrated voice and data TCM line-s when the transmission is from the Meridian SL-1 to the digital telephone or associated terminal.
PRACTICE l If required, packetizes several message. SD 553-2201-193 messages into one DS-30X The Receive ~Processor receives incoming signaling messages from digital telephones, via the Set Gate Array and: (e) Receive /1Processor. (f) l Converts incoming DS30X signaling messages to SSD message format. l Will repacketize a long message into several SSD sized (2-bytes) messages when required. Format l Converter.
PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Table 1-A ISDLC CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS CHARACTERISTICS DESCRIPTION circuits per pack 8 voice/data options nil impedance 100 R I+loop limits -QPC578A ,and B ,+ -QPC578C 100 (30 m) to 3000 feet (900 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable (i-30 VDC at 60 mA) 0$3500 feet ilO67 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable (i-30 VDC at 60 line rate 512 kbps & 100 ppm line coding bipolar return-to-zero alternate mark inversion (BPRZ-AMI) power supply -52 VDC unregulated or -48 VDC regulated and k6 VDC, f 15
